R PD6120D Plasma Monitor Service Manual PD6120D /U1B PD6120D 02AW855010 SIG First Issue:2001.08 Please use this service manual with referring to the user guide (D.F.U) without fail. Printed in Japan REMARK : The PD6120D is a same product as the PX-61XM1A except the brand indications and accessories. Please refer to the PX-61XM1A service manual (PART No. 007A) except following parts. POS. NO. VERS. PART NO. DESCRIPTION PK21 ZK334W0010 RC5010DPD (03S120012) PK30 02AW851210 USER GUIDE for PD6120D (07S900024) M21 02AW248010 FRONT PANEL ASSY (029DS0221) Following spare parts are different from PX-61XM1A ones. (refer page 9-1 ) INPUT SELECT VOLUME POWER/STANDBY MARANTZ DESIGN AND SERVICE Using superior design and selected high grade components, MARANTZ company has created the ultimate in stereo sound. Only original MARANTZ parts can insure that your MARANTZ product will continue to perform to the specifications for which it is famous. Parts for your MARANTZ equipment are generally available to our National Marantz Subsidiary or Agent. ORDERING PARTS : Parts can be ordered either by mail or by Fax.. In both cases, the correct part number has to be specified. The following information must be supplied to eliminate delays in processing your order : 1. Complete address 2. Complete part numbers and quantities required 3. Description of parts 4. Model number for which part is required 5. Way of shipment 6. Signature : any order form or Fax. must be signed, otherwise such part order will be considered as null and void. SHOCK, FIRE HAZARD SERVICE TEST : CAUTION : After servicing this appliance and prior to returning to customer, measure the resistance between either primary AC cord connector pins ( with unit NOT connected to AC mains and its Power switch ON ), and the face or Front Panel of product and controls and chassis bottom. Any resistance measurement less than 1 Megohms should cause unit to be repaired or corrected before AC power is applied, and verified before it is return to the user/customer. Ref. UL Standard No. 1492. In case of difficulties, do not hesitate to contact the Technical Department at above mentioned address. 010620 SIG USA USA MARANTZ AMERICA, INC MARANTZ AMERICA, INC. 1100 MAPLEWOOD DRIVE ITASCA, IL. 60143 USA PHONE : 630 - 741 - 0300 FAX : 630 - 741 - 0301 BRAZIL BRAZIL PHILIPS DA AMAZONIA IND. ELET. ITDA PHILIPS DA AMAZONIA IND. ELET. ITDA CENTRO DE INFORMACOES AO CEP 04698-970 SAO PAULO, SP, BRAZIL PHONE : 0800 - 123123(Discagem Direta Gratuita) FAX : +55 11 534. 8988 JAPAN JAPAN Technical MARANTZ JAPAN, INC. MARANTZ JAPAN, INC. 35- 1, 7- CHOME, SAGAMIONO SAGAMIHARA - SHI, KANAGAWA JAPAN 228-8505 PHONE : +81 42 748 1013 FAX : +81 42 741 9190 EUROPE / TRADING EUROPE / TRADING MARANTZ EUROPE B.V. MARANTZ EUROPE B.V. P.O.BOX 80002, BUILDING SFF2 5600 JB EINDHOVEN THE NETHERLANDS PHONE : +31 - 40 - 2732241 FAX : +31 - 40 - 2735578 TECHNICAL AUDIO GROUP PTY, LTD TECHNICAL AUDIO GROUP PTY, LTD 558 DARLING STREET, BALMAIN, NSW 2041, AUSTRALIA PHONE : 61 - 2 - 9810 - 5300 FAX : 61 - 2 - 9810 - 5355 CANADA CANADA LENBROOK INDUSTRIES LIMITED LENBROOK INDUSTRIES LIMITED 633 GRANITE COURT, PICKERING, ONTARIO L1W 3K1 CANADA PHONE : 905 - 831 - 6333 FAX : 905 - 831 - 6936 AUSTRALIA AUSTRALIA QualiFi Pty Ltd, QualiFi Pty Ltd, 24 LIONEL ROAD, MT. WAVERLEY VIC 3149 AUSTRALIA PHONE : +61 - (0)3 - 9543 - 1522 FAX : +61 - (0)3 - 9543 - 3677 NEW ZEALAND NEW ZEALAND WILDASH AUDIO SYSTEMS NZ WILDASH AUDIO SYSTEMS NZ 14 MALVERN ROAD MT ALBERT AUCKLAND NEW ZEALAND PHONE : +64 - 9 - 8451958 FAX : +64 - 9 - 8463554 THAILAND THAILAND MRZ STANDARD CO.,LTD MRZ STANDARD CO.,LTD 746 - 754 MAHACHAI ROAD., WANGBURAPAPIROM, PHRANAKORN, BANGKOK, 10200 THAILAND PHONE : +66 - 2 - 222 9181 FAX : +66 - 2 - 224 6795 TAIWAN TAIWAN PAI- YUING CO., LTD. PAI- YUING CO., LTD. 6 TH FL NO, 148 SUNG KIANG ROAD, TAIPEI, 10429, TAIWAN R.O.C. PHONE : +886 - 2 - 25221304 FAX : +886 - 2 - 25630415 MALAYSIA MALAYSIA WO KEE HONG ELECTRONICS SDN. BHD. WO KEE HONG ELECTRONICS SDN. BHD. SUITE 8.1, LEVEL 8, MENARA GENESIS, NO. 33, JALAN SULTAN ISMAIL, 50250 KUALA LUMPUR, MALAYSIA PHONE : +60 3 - 2457677 FAX : +60 3 - 2458180 AMERICAS AMERICAS SUPERSCOPE TECHNOLOGIES, INC. SUPERSCOPE TECHNOLOGIES, INC. MARANTZ PROFESSIONAL PRODUCTS 2640 WHITE OAK CIRCLE, SUITE A AURORA, ILLINOIS 60504 USA PHONE : 630 - 820 - 4800 FAX : 630 - 820 - 8103 AUSTRALIA AUSTRALIA KOREA KOREA MK ENTERPRISES LTD. MK ENTERPRISES LTD. ROOM 604/605, ELECTRO-OFFICETEL, 16-58, 3GA, HANGANG-RO, YONGSAN-KU, SEOUL KOREA PHONE : +822 - 3232 - 155 FAX : +822 - 3232 - 154 SINGAPORE SINGAPORE WO KEE HONG DISTRIBUTION PTE LTD WO KEE HONG DISTRIBUTION PTE LTD 130 JOO SENG ROAD #03-02 OLIVINE BUILDING SINGAPORE 368357 PHONE : +65 858 5535 / +65 381 8621 FAX : +65 858 6078 MODEL PX-61XM1A PX-61XM1G PX-61XM1U-S1 No. 007A PlasmaSync™ Multimedia Monitor SERVICE MANUAL SAFETY CAUTION: Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service technician read and follow the “Safety Precautions” and “Product Safety Notice” in this Service Manual. WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing. Better Service Better Reputation Better Profit CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................. 2-1 USER’S MANUAL .............................................................................................................................................. 3-1 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................................... 4-1 METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 5-1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................... 6-1 METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY ........................................................................................................................... 7-1 PACKAGING ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-1 PARTS LIST....................................................................................................................................................... 9-1 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................................................. 10-1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS ......................................................................................................................................... 11-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................................ 12-1 1-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2-1 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN REAR COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. This symbol warns the user that unin- sulated voltage within the unit may have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit. This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been included. Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems. ATTENTION RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS ENLEVER LE CONVERCLE ARRÈRE. AUCUN DES ELEMENTS INTERNES NE DOIT ETRE REPARE PAR L'UTILISATEUR. NE CONFIER L' ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE. L'éclair fléché dans un triangle équilatéral est destiné à avertir l'utilisateur de la présence, dans l'appareil, d'une zone non-isolée soumise à une haute tension dont l'intensité est suffi- sante pour constituer un risque d'électro- cution. Le point d'exclamation dans un triangle équi- latéral est destiné à attirer l' attention de l'uti- lisateur sur la présence d'informations de founctionnement et d'entretien importantes dans la brochure accompagnant l'appareil. WARNING HEATSINK MAY BE ENERGIZED. TEST BEFORE TOUCHING. 1. Before returning an instrument to the customer, al- ways make a safety check of the entire instrument, in- cluding, but not limited to, the following items. a. Be sure that no built-in protective devices are defective and/or have been defeated during servicing. (1) Protective shields are provided on this chassis to protect both the technician and the customer. Correctly replace all missing pro- tective shields, including any removed for serv- icing convenience. (2) When reinstalling the chassis and/or other assembly in the cabinet, be sure to put back in place all protective devices, including,but not limited to, nonmetallic control knobs,insulating fishpapers,adjustment and compartment covers/shields, and isolation re- sistor/capacitor networks. Do not operate this instrument or permit it to be operated with- out all protective devices correctly installed and functioning. b. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous volt- age. Such opening include,but are not limited to, (1) spacing between the picture tube and the cabinet mask, (2) excessively wide cabinet ven- tilation slots, and (3) an improperly fitted and/or incorrectly secured cabinet back cover. c. Leakage Current Hot Check — With the instru- ment completely reassembled,plug the AC line cord directly into a 240V AC outlet. (Do not use an isolation transformer during this test.) Use a leakage current tester or a metering system that complies with American National Standards In- stitutes (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Ap- pliances and Underwriters Laboratories(UL) 1950. With the instrument AC switch first in the ON position and then in the OFF position, mea- sure from a known earth ground (metal waterpipe, conduit,etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument(antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts,etc.), especially any ex- posed metal parts that offer an electrical return path to the chassis. Any current measured must not exceed 3.5 milliamp. Reverse the instru- ment power cord plug in the outlet and repeat test.ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER. AC Leakage Test 2. Read and comply with all caution and safety-related notes on or inside the Monitor cabinet, on the Pro- jection Monitor chassis, or on the picture tube. 3. Design Alteration Warning — Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this unit. Design alterations and additions, including, but not limited to, circuit modifications and the addition of the items such as auxiliary audio and/or video out- put connections might alter the safety characteris- tics of this Monitor and create a hazard to the user. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufacturer's warranty and will make you,the servicer,responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. 4. Hot Chassis Warning — a. Some MultiSync Monitor chassis are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord and may be safely serviced without an isolation transformer only if the AC power plug is inserted so that the chassis is connected to the ground side of the AC power source. To confirm that the AC power plug is in- serted correctly, with an AC voltmeter measure be- tween the chassis and a known earth ground. If a voltage reading in excess of 1.0V is obtained, re- move and reinsert the AC power plug in the oppo- site polarity and again measure the voltage poten- tial between the chassis and a known earth ground. b. Some Plasma chassis normally have 85V AC (RMS), between chassis and earth ground regard- less of the AC plug polarity. These chassis can be safely serviced only with an isolation transformer inserted in the power line between the receiver and the AC power source, for both personnel and test equipment protection. c. Some Plasma chassis have a secondary ground systems in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground sys- tem is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground system are electrically separated by insulat- ing material that must not be defeated or altered. (READING SHOULD NOT BE ABOVE 3.5 mA) LEAKAGE CURRENT TESTER + – EARTH GROUND TEST ALL EXPOSED METAL SURFACES 3-WIRE CORD ALSO TEST WITH PLUG REVERSED (USING AC ADAPTER PLUG AS REQUIRED) DEVICE UNDER TEST 2-2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5. Observe original lead dress. Take extra care to assure correct lead dress in the following areas: a. near sharp edges, b. near thermally hot parts— be sure that leads and components do not touch thermally hot parts, c. the AC supply, d. high volt- age, and e. antenna wiring. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-of-place, or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between components, and be- tween components and the printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. 6. Components,parts, and/or wiring that appear to have overheated or are otherwise damaged should be replaced with components, parts, or wiring that meet original specifications. Additionally,determine the cause of overheating and/or damage and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 7. PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE —Many MultiSync Monitor electrical and mechanical parts have spe- cial safety-related characteristics some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, nor can the protection they give necessarily be ob- tained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by shading with a mark on schemat- ics and by shading or a mark in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement part that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recom- mended replacement part in this service data parts list might create shock, fire, and/or other hazards. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2-3 1. Avant de remettre un appareil à un client, faire toujours d'abord un examen de sécurité de l'appareil en entier comprenant, mais ne s'y limitant pas les points cités ci-dessous: a. Vérifier qu' aucun des dispositifs de protection ne soit défectueux ou n' ait été endommagé pendant les travaux. (1) Les volets protecteurs sur ce châssis ont été montés pour protéger aussi bien le technicien que le client. Remplacer correctement tous les volets protecteurs manquants, aussi bien que ceux qui ont pu être enlevés pour la commodité des travaux. (2) Quand vous remettez le châssis ou d'autres assemblages ensemble dans le coffret, vérifier qu' ont été remis à leur place tous les dispositifs de protection, comprenant mais ne s' y limitant point, les boutons de contrôle non-métalliques, les feuilles d'isolation, les couverture/volets de l'ajustement et du compartiment, et l'isolation des réseaux résistance/condensateur. Ne pas travailler sur cet appareil ni permettre qu'y soit effectué un travail sans que tous les dispositifs de protection n' y soient correctement installés fonctionnants. b. Bien vérifier qu'il n'y ait aucune ouverture sur le coffret qui ne puisse permettre à un adulte ou à un enfant d'y faire pénétrer ses doigts et attraper une décharge électrique. De telles ouvertures comprendraient sans pour autant s'y limiter (1) l'espace entre le tube à im- ages et le coffret de l'eppareil, (2) les espaces excessivement ouverts pour la ventilation et (3) la couverture arrière du coffret improprement fixée ou incorrectement protegée. c. Vérification de courant de fuite L'appareil ayant été complètement réassemblé, brancher-le à une prise de courant de 240V. (Ne pas se servir d'un transformateur d'isolation pendant ce test). Se servir d'un vérificateur de courant d'excitation ou d'un système de mesure conforme aux normes ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances et U. L (Underwriters Laboratories) 1950. Le bou- ton de l'appareil en position "Marche" et ensuite en position "Arrêt", mesurer à partir d'une prise de terre (métallique tuyauterie, conduite, etc...) à toutes les pièces métalliques de l'appareil exposées (antennes, poignet métalliques, coffren métallique, tête des vis, surfaces métalliques, traits de contrôle, etc.) surtout à toutes les pièces métalliques exposées qui peuvent reconduire le courant au châssis. En aucun cas, la mesure du courant ne doit dépasser 3.5 milliamp. Inverser la fiche de courant de l'appareil dans la prise et répéter le test. Tout mesurage ne s'arrêtant pas aux limites spécifiées icicomporte un ris- que de décharge électrique dangereux, qui doit être éliminé, avant que l'appareil ne soit remis au client. 2. Lire et respecter toutes les mises en garde et notes de sécurité à l'intérieur ou à l'extérieur du coffret du rétro-projecteur, sur le châssis du rétro-projecteur ou sur le tube à images. 3. Mise en garde contre la modification du dessin Ne pas modifier ni ajouter à la pièce mécanique ou électrique du modèle. Des modifications ou addi- tions, comportant, mais ne s'y limitant pas, des modifications des circuits et l'addition d'éléments tels que des auxilliairs audio et/ou des branchements pour la prise de vidéo, pourrait éprouver la sécurité de ce rétro-projecteur et créer un risque pour l'utilisateur. Tout changement ou ad- dition accomplie annulera la garantie du fabricant et va rendre votre service d'entretien, responsable des dommages corporels ou de biens en résultant. 4. Mise en garde contre le châssis sous tension a. Certains châssis de rétro-projecteur sont électriquement reliés à un conducteur du fil de courant et ainsi peuvent ne comporter aucun ris- que sans un transformateur d'isolation seulement si la prise de courant est branchée, de manière que le châssis est relié à la prise de terre de la source de courant. Pour s'assurer que la prise de courant est correctement insérée, relever les mesures avec un voltmètre de courant entre le châssis et un point de prise de terre bien connu. Si le voltage indiqué est supérieur à 1,0V, débrancher et reinsérer la prise de courant dans la polarité contraire et une fois de plus remesurer le voltage potentiel entre le câssis et la prise de terre. EXAMEN DE COURANT D'EXCITATION (LA MESURE DU COURANT NE DOIT PAS DEPASSER 3.5 MILLIAMP) + – EXAMINER TOUTES LES PIECES METALLIQUES DEL' APPAREIL EXPOSEE 3-CORDES DE FIL EXAMINER AVEC LA FICHE DE COURANT INVERSEE DISPOSIT IF SOUS L ' EXAMEN VERIFICATEUR DE CORANT DE FUITE PRISE DE TERRE (SE SERVIR DE LA FICHE DE COURANT DE L' A DAPTATEUR COMME DEMANDEE) PRECAUTIONS DE SECURITE 2-4 PRECAUTIONS DE SECURITE b. Certains châssis de moniteur ont habituellement 85V (RMS) entre le châssis et la prise de terre, en fonction de la polarité de la prise de courant. Ces châssis peuvent ne comporter aucun risque seulement avec un transformateur d'isolation inséré dans la ligne de puissance située entre de rétro-projecteur et la source d'électricité, cela pour la protection aussi bien du personnel que du matériel de vérfication. c. Certains châssis de rétro-projecteur ont un système secondaire de masse en addition avec le système principal de masse du châssis. Ce système secondaire de masse n'est pas isolé du courant électrique. Les deux systèmes sont électriquement séparés par du matériel d'isolation qu' on vérifiera bien qu'il ne soit ni altéré ni défectueux. 5. Vérifier la couverture originale en plomb. Accorder la plus grande attention à la couverture de plomb notamment aux endroits ci-dessous indiqués. a. Près des bords aigus b. près des parties très chaudes Vérifier que les composants et les plombs ne touchent pas les parties très chaudes telles que: c. l'alimentation du courant d. la haute tension e. Ies fils de l'antenne Pousser l'inspection, à tous les endroits, à la recher- che des cordes pincées, déplacées ou effilochées. Ne pas changer l'écartement entre composants, et entre composants et le tableau de circuit imprimé. Vérifier que le fil de conduite électrique est en bon état. 6. Les composants, parts (pièces) et/ou fils qui ont été trouvés surchauffés devraient être remplacés avec les composants, pièces et fils s'y reliant avec d'autre qui ont les mêmes spécifications que les originales. De plus, rechercher la cause du surchauffement et/ ou des dommages et si nécessaire, prendre les mesures propres pour prévenir tout risque potentiel. 7. Note sur sûreté de l'appareil Beaucoup de pièce de rétro-projecteur, qu'elles soient électriques ou mécaniques, ont des disposi- tions de sécurité qui ne sont pas toujours évidentes d'une simple inspection visuelle et la protection qu'elles donnent nécessairement ne pourront être pas obtenues par les remplaçants avec des composants aux voltages ou watts plus élevés. Les pièces qui ont des caractéristiques particulières de sécurité sont identifiées avec un trait marqué sur les schémas et sont ombragés ou comportent un trait sur la liste des pièces. L'utilisation d'un produit substitutif qui n'aurait pas les mêmes caractéristiques comme il est recommandé dans ces données d'entretien pourrait provoquer une décharge électrique, un feu, et/ou d'autres dangers. 2-5 2-6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1 . Cautions for disassembly (1) For the suspension-type set (No. of workers: 3 to 5 including assistants) • Take adequate measures in order not to dam- age the surface of the set or the filter, using a protection mat (vinyl sheet or blanket). • When relieving the set from the condition of suspension from the ceiling, do not tilt its main body too much by supporting its both sides, while the mounting hooks (top and bottom) are released. (Reasons: If the main body is posi- tioned slantwise, a load is applied to its upper part and there can be danger of making the set fall down carelessly when the set is un- hooked.) • During disassembly, the allocation of person- nel should be such that suitable stands or plat- forms are assuredly arranged to enable the personnel to support the set, standing on both sides of the set. For safety, it is preferable to provide for assistant personnel who can receive the removed set. • During this removal work, support the set at its frame with hands. Never touch the filter or glass surface. Assistant personnel on the front side should apply hands to the lower part of the casing. [If the casing is strongly hit with a wooden hammer or the like, the unseen side area of the module panel glass may be broken even though the module itself does not seem to have been broken . Therefore , support the frame by hand in order not to drop it.] (2) For the wall-hang type, corner type, or pole unit mounting set (No. of workers: 2 ) • Examining a good timing, release the mount- ing hooks (top and bottom) from the right and the left. • If the set is installed in an elevated place, pro- vide for firm scaffolds in advance. It is prefer- able to ask for the support of assistant person- nel as in the case of the suspension type. • During this removal work, try to support the set at its frame with hands. Never touch the filter or glass surface. Assistant personnel on the front side should apply hands to the lower part of the casing. [If the casing is strongly hit with a wooden hammer or the like, the unseen side area of the module panel glass may be broken even though the module itself does not seem to have been broken. Therefore, support the frame by hand in order not to drop it.] 2. The least minimum caut ions for product disas- sembly • Secure a working space, arranged as wide as pos- sible. • Prior to disassembling the set, protect the acrylic surface with an air mat or the like. • To prevent the thread ridges from being damaged, use an adequate screwdriver. • Many screws are actually used. Therefore, use two or three containers where these screws can be kept . Never disassemble the inner parts of the module (pipes, etc.). • When lifting the module from the set, two persons should stand on both sides of the module to hold the stable parts of the junction while they lift the module upright. (If dust or such foreign substance enters in between the module and the filter, moir* or similar problems can arise. In addition, once it enters, it is necessary to take careful measures not to damage the contamination area while re- moving contaminants.) [Please understand that the replacement of the module may call for an air-blast treatment (air brush) in a clean room.] Complementary caution) In particular, if a conduc- tive foreign matter (such as a metallic chip) is at- tached to the flexible cable of the module, there can be danger of the occurrence of a phenom- enon like wire breakage that is caused by parti- tion breakdown in the module. For this reason, it is necessary to bear in mind that the flow of air blast should be directed only in the predetermined direction at all times. 3. Method of returning the set (when returning the set to the manufacturing base in Japan) • When returning the set, put the set in the speci- fied package box. Otherwise, swinging and vibration Ioads may be applied to the set during transportation, and this may give rise to destruction of a mounting sec- tion, such as gas-hermetically-sealed pipe (glass) of the moduIe. • When optional parts are also put in the box for returning, a list of options (accessories) should also be produced and returned, if possible. This ar- rangement is effective to confirm the owner of the returned items. • To confirm the user-oriented problem, and for the purpose of future improvements, a report of rea- sons for malfunction should also be packed. A definite address should be specified so that the repaired set can be returned and faulty phenom- ena can be confirmed . SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2-7 (Notes) The component by the name of “module” used in this product is defined as a section that is pro- vided with a digital circuit board (including high- voltage parts) used to emit light in the glass panel part, excluding the surface acrylic fiIter or the tem- pered glass fiIter. It must be noted that it does never mean the glass panel part only. USER’S MANUAL 3-1 PlasmaSync Plasma Monitor User’s Manual NEC Technologies Precautions Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC plasma monitor and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION:TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit. This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been included. Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems. WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ALSO DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLETS, UNLESS THE PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED. REFRAIN FROM OPENING THE CABINET AS THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Important Information Warnings and Safety Precaution The NEC plasma monitor is designed and manufactured to provide long, trouble-free service. No maintenance other than cleaning is required. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the panel. Never use solvents such as alcohol or thinner to clean the panel surface. The plasma display panel consists of fine picture elements (cells). Although NEC produces the plasma display panels with more than 99.99 percent active cells, there may be some cells that do not produce light or remain lit. For operating safety and to avoid damage to the unit, read carefully and observe the following instructions. To avoid shock and fire hazards: 1. Provide adequate space for ventilation to avoid internal heat build-up. Do not cover rear vents or install the unit in a closed cabinet or shelves. The unit is equipped with cooling fans. If you install the unit in an enclosure, make sure there is adequate space at the top of the unit to allow hot air to rise and escape. If the monitor becomes too hot, the overheat protector will be activated and the monitor will be turned off. If this happens, turn off the power to the monitor and unplug the power cord. If the room where the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move the monitor to a cooler location, and wait for the monitor to cool for 60 minutes. If the problem persists, contact your NEC dealer for service. 2. Do not use the power cord polarized plug with extension cords or outlets unless the prongs can be completely inserted. 3. Do not expose the unit to water or moisture. 4. Avoid damage to the power cord, and do not attempt to modify the power cord. 5. Unplug the unit during electrical storms or if the unit will not be used over a long period. 6. Do not open the cabinet which has potentially dangerous high voltage components inside. If the unit is damaged in this way the warranty will be void. Moreover, there is a serious risk of electric shock. 7. Do not attempt to service or repair the unit. NEC is not liable for any bodily harm or damage caused if unqualified persons attempt service or open the back cover. Refer all service to authorized NEC Service Centers. NOTE: When you connect a computer to this monitor, attach the supplied ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not comform to mandatory FCC standards. Attaching the ferrite cores: Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied). Close the lid tightly until the clamps click. Use the band to fasten the ferrite core (supplied) to the DVI cable. DVI cable (not supplied) core (small) core (small) Connector band band Power cable (supplied) core (large) core (large) To avoid damage and prolong operating life: 1. Use only with 120V 50/60Hz AC power supply. Continued operation at line voltages greater than 120 Volts AC will shorten the life of the unit, and might even cause a fire hazard. 2. Handle the unit carefully when installing it and do not drop. 3. Set the unit away from heat, excessive dust, and direct sunlight. 4. Protect the inside of the unit from liquids and small metal objects. In case of accident, unplug the unit and have it serviced by an authorized NEC Service Center. 5. Do not hit or scratch the panel surface as this causes flaws on the surface of the screen. 6. For correct installation and mounting it is strongly recommended to use a trained,authorized NEC dealer. 7. As is the case with any phosphor-based display (like a CRT monitor, for example) light output will gradually decrease over the life of a Plasma Display Panel. Recommendations to avoid or minimize phosphor burn-in Like all phosphor-based display devices and all other gas plasma displays, plasma monitors can be susceptible to phosphor burn under certain circumstances. Certain operating conditions, such as the continuous display of a static image over a prolonged period of time, can result in phosphor burn if proper precautions are not taken. To protect your investment in this NEC plasma monitor, please adhere to the following guidelines and recommendations for minimizing the occurrence of image burn: * Always enable and use your computer’s screen saver function during use with a computer input source. * Display a moving image whenever possible. * Change the position of the menu display from time to time. * Always power down the monitor when you are finished using it. If the plasma monitor is in long term use or continuous operation take the following measures to reduce the likelihood of phosphor burn: * Lower the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as possible without impairing image readability. * Display an image with many colors and color gradations (i.e. photographic or photo-realistic images). * Create image content with minimal contrast between light and dark areas, for example white characters on black backgrounds. Use complementary or pastel color whenever possible. * Avoid displaying images with few colors and distinct, sharply defined borders between colors. Contact NEC Technologies at 1-800-836-0655 for other recommended procedures that will best suit your particular application needs. Précautions Veuillez lire ce manuel avec attention avant d’utiliser votre moniteur PlasmaSync NEC et conserver ce manuel à portée de la main pour une consultation ultérieure. ATTENTION RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS OUVRIR MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D’ELECTRO- CUTION, NE PAS DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N’Y A AUCUNE PIECE UTILISABLE A L’INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER LES TRAVAUX D’ENTRETIEN QU’A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE. Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l’utilisateur de la présence d’une tension dangereuse, non isolée se trouvant à l’intérieur de l’appareil. Elle est d’une intensité suffisante pour constituer un risque d’électrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pièces à l’intérieur de cet appareil. Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l’utilisateur de la présence d’importantes instructions concernant l’entretien et le fonctionnement de cet appareil. Par conséquent, elles doivent être lues attentivement afin d’éviter des problèmes. AVERTISSEMENT AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER CET APPAREIL A LA PLUIE OU A L’HUMIDITE. AUSSI, NE PAS UTILISER LA FICHE POLARISEE AVEC UN PROLONGATEUR OU UNE AUTRE PRISE DE COURANT SAUF SI CES LAMES PEUVENT ETRE INSEREES A FOND. NE PAS OUVRIR LE COFFRET, DES COMPOSANTS HAUTE TENSION SE TROUVENT A L’INTERIEUR. LAISSER A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE LE SOIN DE REPARER CET APPAREIL. DOC avis de conformation Cet appareil numérigue de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement sur le Matériel Brouilleur du Canada. Mises en garde et précautions de sécurité Le moniteur PlasmaSync NEC a été conçu et fabriqué pour une utilisation fiable et durable. Il ne nécessite aucun entretien en dehors du nettoyage. Utiliser un chiffon doux et sec pour nettoyer la surface de l’écran. Ne jamais utiliser de solvant comme l’alcool ou le diluant. Le panneau à affichage plasma est constitué de fines particules d’images ou pixels (cellules). Bien que NEC produise des panneaux à affichage plasma avec plus de 99,99 % de cellules actives, il peut y avoir des cellules qui ne produisent pas de lumière ou qui restent allumées. Pour des raisons de sécurité et pour éviter d’endommager l’appareil, lire attentivement les instructions suivantes. Pour éviter les risques d’éléctrocution et d’incendie: 1. Laisser suffisament d’espace autour de l’appareil pour la ventilation et éviter toute augmentation excessive de la température interne. Ne pas couvrir les évents ou l’installer dans un endroit trop exigu. L’appareil est équipé de ventilateurs de refroidissement. Si vous installez l’appareil dans un espace clos, assurezvous qu’il y ait suffisamment d’espace au dessus pour permettre à l’air chaud de s’élever et de s’évacuer. Si la température du moniteur devient excessive, la protection contre les surchauffes entrera en action et coupera l’alimentation. Dans ce cas, éteindre l’appareil et débrancher le câble d’alimentation. Si la température de la pièce dans laquelle le moniteur est installé est particulièrement excessive, déplacer l’appareil dans un endroit plus frais et le laisser refroidir 60 minutes. Si le problème persiste, prendre contact avec le revendeur NEC pour le service après-vente. 2. Ne pas utiliser la fiche polarisée du cordon d’alimentation avec des prolongateurs ou des prises de courant, sauf si les lames peuvent être insérées à fond. 3. Ne pas exposer à L’eau ou à l’humidité. 4. Eviter d’endommager le cordon d’alimentation, et ne pas modifier le cordon d’alimentation. 5. Débrancher l’appareil pendant les tempêtes ou si l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant une longue période. 6. Ne pas ouvrir le coffret. Des composants de haute tension se trouvent à l’intérieur. Si l’appareil est endommagé de cette manière, la garantie devient caduque. De plus, il y a risque d’électrocution. 7. Ne pas essayer de réparer ou entretenir l’appareil soimême. NEC ne saura être tenu pour responsable pour toute blessure ou dommage causé par des personnes non qualifiées qui essayent de réparer ou d’ouvrir le couvercle arrière. Confier toute réparation à un centre de service agréé NEC. REMARQUE: Lorsque vous branchez un micro-ordinateur sur ce moniteur, fixez les noyaux en ferrites fournis. Si vous ne le faîtes, le moniteur ne sera pas en conformité avec les exigences des standards FCC. Fixation des noyaux en ferrite. Monter les tores en ferrite aux deux extrêmités du câble DVI (non fourni) et aux deux extrêmités du câble d’alimentation électrique (fourni). Fermez doucement le couvercle jusqu’à ce que les crans se clipsent. Fixer le tore en ferrite (fourni) au câble DVI à l’aide d’un collier. Câble DVI (non fourni) Connecteur noyau (petit) noyau (petit) Collier Collier noyau (large) Câble d'alimentation électrique (fourni) noyau (large) Pour éviter des dommages et prolonger la durée de service de l’appareil: 1. N’utiliser qu’une source d’alimentation de 120 V 50/ 60 Hz CA. Le fait d’utiliser l’appareil en continu à des tensions de ligne supérieures à 120 Volts CA réduit sa durée de vie et risque de provoquer un incendie. 2. Manipuler l’appareil avec soin pendant son déplacement et ne pas le faire tomber. 3. Eloigner l’appareil des endroits chauds, très poussiéreux et exposés en plein soleil. 4. Eviter que des liquides et des petits objets métalliques pénètrent à l’intérieur de l’appareil. En cas d’accident, débrancher l’appareil et le confier à un centre de service agréé NEC. 5. Ne pas frapper ou rayer la surface de la écran plasma, car des défauts risquent de se produire sur la surface de la écran plasma. 6. Pour effectuer une installation et un montage corrects, il est recommandé de faire appel au concessionnaire NEC autorisé et spécialisé. 7. Comme c’est le cas pour tout affichage à base de phosphore (comme un moniteur CRT, par exemple), la puissance de lumière baisse graduellement au cours de la vie du Panneau d’Affichage à Plasma. Pour éviter le risque de combustion au phosphore, les mesures suivantes sont recommandées : Comme tous les appareils d’affichage à base de phosphore et tous les autres affichages à gaz plasma, les moniteurs Plasmasync peuvent être sujets à la combustion au phosphore dans certaines circonsatnces. Certaines conditions d’utilisation, telles que l’affichage continu d’une image statique pour une durée prolongée, peuvent causer des brûlures au phophore si aucune précaution n’est prise. Pour protéger votre investissement dans ce moniteur PlasmaSync NEC, veuillez suivre les directives et les recommandations suivantes pour minimiser l’occurence de brûlure d’image : • Assurez-vous de mettre en marche et d’utliser l’économisateur d’écran chaque fois que c’est possible lorsque vous l’utilisez avec une source d’entrée d’ordinateur. • Affichez une image en mouvement aussi souvent que possible. • Changer la position de l’affichage de menu de temps à autre. • Coupez toujours l’alimentation lorsque vous avez terminé d’utiliser la moniteur. Si le moniteur est en usage continu ou longue durée, prenez les mesures suivantes afin d’éviter l’occurence de combustion au phosphore : • Abaissez le niveau de l’image (contraste, luminosité) autant que possible, sans faire perdre la lisibilité de l’image. • Affichez une image avec de nombreuses couleurs et graduations de couleur (par ex. des images photographiques ou photo-réalistes). • Créez un contenu d’image avec un contraste minimal entre les zones sombres et les zones claires, par exemple, des caractères blancs sur un fond noir. Utilisez des couleurs complémentaires ou pastels le plus souvent possible. • Évitez d’afficher des images avec peu de couleurs et des limites nettes et clairement définies entre les couleurs. Contactez NEC Technologies au 1-800-836-0655 pour d’autres procédures recommandées qui conviendront le mieux au besoin de votre appareil. NEC Technologies, Inc. (hereinafter NECTECH) warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship under the following terms and, subject to the conditions set forth below, agrees to repair or replace (at NECTECH’s sole option) any part of the enclosed unit which proves defective. Replacement parts or products may be new or refurbished and will meet specifications of the original parts or products. HOW LONG IS THE WARRANTY? Parts and labor are warranted for (1) one year from the date of the first customer purchase. WHO IS PROTECTED? This warranty may be enforced only by the first purchaser. WHAT IS COVERED AND WHAT IS NOT COVERED Except as specified below, this warranty covers all defects in material or workmanship in this product. The following are not covered by the warranty: 1. Any product which is not distributed in the U.S.A., Canada or Mexico by NECTECH or which is not purchased in the U.S.A., Canada or Mexico from an authorized NECTECH dealer. 2.Any product of which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed. 3.Damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from: a. Accident, misuse, abuse, neglect, fire, water, lightning or other acts of nature, unauthorized product modification, or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product. b.Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by NECTECH. c. Any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier). d.Removal or installation of the product. e. Any other cause which does not relate to a product defect. f. Burns or residual images upon the phosphor of the panel. 4.Cartons, carrying cases, batteries, external cabinets, magnetic tapes, or any accessories used in connection with the product. 5.Service outside of the U.S.A. and Canada. WHAT WE WILL PAY FOR AND WHAT WE WILL NOT PAY FOR We will pay labor and material expenses for covered items, but we will not pay for the following: 1. Removal or installation charges. 2. Costs of initial technical adjustments (set-up), including adjustment of user controls. These costs are the responsibility of the NECTECH dealer from whom the product was purchased. 3. Shipping charges. HOW YOU CAN GET WARRANTY SERVICE 1.To obtain service on your product, consult the dealer from whom you purchased the product. 2.Whenever warranty service is required, the original dated invoice (or a copy) must be presented as proof of warranty coverage. Please also include in any mailing your name, address and a description of the problem(s). 3.For the name of the nearest NECTECH authorized service center, call NECTECH at 800-836-0655. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this warranty statement, we will not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, consequential, or other types of damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory, whether or not we have been advised of the possibility of such damages. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES NECTECH’ s liability for any defective product is limited to the repair or replacement of the product at our option. NECTECH shall not be liable for: 1.Damage to other property caused by any defects in this product, damages based upon inconvenience, loss of use of the product, loss of time, commercial loss; or 2.Any other damages whether incidental, consequential or otherwise. Some states do not allow limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts and/or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. HOW STATE LAW RELATES TO THE WARRANTY This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. FOR MORE INFORMATION, TELEPHONE 800-836-0655 NEC TECHNOLOGIES, INC. 1250 N. Arlington Heights Road, Suite 500 Itasca, Illinois 60143-1248 Note: All products returned to NECTECH for service MUST have prior approval. To get approval, call NEC Technologies at 800-836-0655. Limited Warranty Plasma Monitors How to Attach Options to the Plasma Monitor .... 1 Introduction ..................................................... 2 Introduction to the PlasmaSync 61MP1 Plasma Monitor........................................................ 2 The features you’ll enjoy include:............................... 2 Contents of the Package ........................................... 2 Options .................................................................. 2 Part Names and Function .................................. 3 Front View............................................................... 3 Rear View / Terminal Board ...................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 5 Battery Installation and Replacement .......................... 6 Using the wired remote control mode ......................... 7 Operating Range ..................................................... 7 Handling the remote control ...................................... 7 Installation ...................................................... 8 Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer ............... 9 Connections with Equipment that has a Digital Interface ... 9 Connecting Your Document Camera ........................... 9 Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player.................. 9 Connecting Your DVD Player ..................................... 9 External Speaker Connections.................................. 10 Pin Assignments and Signal Levels for 15 pin RGB (Analog) ......................................... 11 Pin Configuration and Signal of the RGB 3 IN Connector (DVI Connector) .............. 11 Basic Operations............................................. 12 POWER ................................................................ 12 To turn the unit ON and OFF: .................................... 12 VOLUME .............................................................. 12 To adjust the volume: ................................................ 12 MUTE ................................................................... 12 To cancel the sound:.................................................. 12 DISPLAY ................................................................ 12 To check the settings: ................................................. 12 DIGITAL ZOOM ..................................................... 12 AUTO ADJUST ...................................................... 12 To adjust the size or quality of the picture automatically: ............................................................ 12 OFF TIMER ........................................................... 13 To set the off timer: ................................................... 13 To check the remaining time: ..................................... 13 To cancel the off timer ............................................... 13 WIDE Operations............................................. 14 Watching with a wide screen (manual) .................... 14 When watching videos or digital video discs............. 14 When watching high definition video source ............. 14 Watching computer images with a wide screen ......... 15 When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” ................... 15 MULTI SCREEN Operations ............................... 16 Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the same time ................................................... 16 Selecting the input signals to be displayed ................. 16 Adjusting the OSM controls...................................... 16 OSM Controls ................................................. 17 Menu Operations ................................................... 17 Picture Settings Menu............................................. 19 Adjusting the picture ................................................. 19 Setting the picture mode according to the brightness of the room ............................................... 20 Setting the color temperature .................................... 21 Adjusting the color to the desired quality ................... 22 Reducing noise in the picture ..................................... 23 Sound Settings Menu .............................................. 24 Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance ........ 24 Screen Settings Menu ............................................. 25 Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj ................................................................ 25 Function Settings Menu .......................................... 26 Setting the on-screen menu ....................................... 26 Adjusting the position of the menu display ................ 27 Setting the power management for computer images . 28 POWER/STANDBY indicator ................................... 29 Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ......... 30 Setting the picture to suit the movie ........................... 30 Setting RGB3 ADJ..................................................... 31 Reducing burn-in of the screen................................... 31 Resetting to the default values.................................... 32 Option Settings Menu ............................................. 33 Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ........... 33 Setting the BNC connectors ...................................... 33 Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select screen ............................................................. 34 Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size ............................................................... 35 Setting the picture size for RGB input signals ............ 36 Information Menu ................................................. 36 Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals, and resolution ........................................................... 36 Setting the language for the menus............................. 37 Setting the video signal format .................................. 37 External Control ............................................. 39 Table of Signals Supported .............................. 47 Supported resolution .............................................. 47 Troubleshooting............................................. 49 Specifications ................................................. 50 Contents 1 You can attach your optional mounts or stand to the plasma monitor in the following way: * Unpack the plasma monitor. (See Drawing A.) * Take it out, put your hand in the handy-grip recess at the rear, and move it to an appropriate place. Then attach the optional mounts or stand. (See Drawing B.) • This device cannot be installed on its own. Be sure to use a stand or original mounting unit. (Wall mount unit, Stand, etc.) * See page 2. • For correct installation and mounting it is strongly recommended to use a trained, authorized NEC dealer. Failure to follow correct mounting procedures could result in damage to the equipment or injury to the installer. Product warranty does not cover damage caused by improper installation. Ventilation Requirements for enclosure mounting To allow heat to disperse, leave space between surrounding objects as shown on the diagram below when installing. How to Attach Options to the Plasma Monitor Drawing A Drawing B 50mm (2") 1580mm (62.2") 990mm (39.0") 50mm (2") 50mm (2") 50mm (2") Wall Wall 50mm (2") 2 Introduction to the PlasmaSync 61MP1 Plasma Monitor NEC’s PlasmaSync™ is a seamless blend of cutting-edge visual technology and sophisticated design. At 61-inches, with a 16:9 aspect ratio, the PlasmaSync 61MP1 certainly makes a big impression. However, at a mere 4.7 inches/ 119 mm thin, the monitor’s sleek techno-art lines blend in well with your environment. PlasmaSync’s crisp, vivid image quality will transform data from any graphic medium from PCs to DVD players- into art. And weighing only 134.5 lbs/ 61 kg, it actually can be hung almost anywhere. NEC has made sure that a host of multimedia resources can be easily connected and displayed as brilliantly as intended on the PlasmaSync™ monitor. The features you’ll enjoy include: • 61-inch screen • 16:9 aspect ratio • Capsulated Color Filter (CCF) and black matrix • The enhanced display in red uses a two-stage filtering system where Accucrimson™ is combined with our special CCF. • 4.7 inch / 119 mm thin • 134.5 lbs/ 61 kg light • High-resolution screen: 1365�768 pixels • 160-degrees of off-axis viewing, horizontally and vertically. • Flicker - and warp - free display provides excellent image geometry even in screen corners • Not affected by magnetic fields, no color drift or edge distortion. • VGA, SVGA, XGA, SXGA, computer signal compatibility • NTSC, PAL, SECAM, composite and S-Video signal compatibility • 480P, 1080I, 720P and HDTV signal compatibility • PCs, VCRs, Laser Disc and DVD player source compatibility • AccuBlend™ scan conversion automatically converts VGA, SVGA and SXGA signals to the panel’s native resolution • Advanced Mass Area Sampling Progressive Scan method is employed. • RGB input (3*), Video input (3), DVD/HD input (2*), Audio input (3), External Control input (1) • AccuColor control system provides user selectable on- screen color temperature settings • New Drive Technology • Component video input terminal for DVD, 15.75kHz (Y, CB, CR ) • Digital broadcasting source compatibitly • NEC’s OSM™ menu-driven on screen control system that makes image adjustments a snap • Seven languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, and Japanese) • A handy-grip recess is provided to facilitate installation and movement. * You can select RGB source or Component source for the 5BNC terminal. When selecting an RGB input, the source is switched to the RGB input (3); when selecting a component input, the source is switched to the DVD/ HD input (2). Contents of the Package � PlasmaSync™ 61MP1 plasma monitor � Power cord � RGB cable (Mini D-Sub 15-pin to Mini D-Sub 15- pin connector) � Remote control with two AAA Batteries � User’s manual � Remote cable � Safety metal fittings* � Ferrite core (small�2, large�2), band * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent tipping due to external shock when using the stand (option). Screw the safety fittings to the holes in the back of the monitor. Options • Wall mount unit • Ceiling mount unit • Tilt mount unit • Tabletop stand • Speakers • Others Introduction 3 Front View t Power Turns the monitor’s power on and off. y POWER/STANDBY indicator When the power is on ............................. Lights green. When the power is in the standby mode ... Lights red. u Remote sensor window Receives the signals from the remote control. Part Names and Function POWER/STANDBY PROCEED INPUT SELECT DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ /EXIT VOLUME POWER/STANDBY PROCEED INPUT SELECT DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ /EXIT VOLUME qPROCEED Sets the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode and displays the main menu. w VOLUME DOWN and UP Adjusts the volume. Functions as the CURSOR (L/ M) buttons in the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode. e LEFT/– and RIGHT/+ Enlarges or reduces the image. Functions as the CURSOR (� / �) buttons in the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode. r INPUT SELECT / EXIT Switches the input, in the following order: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2 → VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1← Functions as the EXIT buttons in the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode. 4 Rear View/ Terminal Board A AC IN Connect the included power cord here. B EXT SPEAKER L and R Connect speakers here. Maintain the correct polarity. C EXTERNAL CONTROL This terminal is used when power ON/OFF, input selection and AUDIO MUTE and other controls are operated externally (by external control). See also page 39 for external control. D REMOTE CONTROL Connect the supplied remote cable here. E CONTROL LOCK When “CONTROL LOCK” is set “ON”, the buttons on the set’s control panel do not function. F VIDEO1, 2, 3 Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Laser Discs, etc. here. G AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3 These are audio input terminals. The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot them to on the menu screen. H DVD1 / HD1 Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. here. I RGB1 Inputs the analog RGB signal of personal computer, etc. J RGB2/ DVD2/ HD2 RGB2: Inputs the analog RGB signal. DVD2/ HD2: Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. here. K RGB3 (DVI 29pin) Inputs a digital RGB signal (TMDS). L Handy-Grip recess Use the recesses (as shown) when you need to carry the display. EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON / OFF SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT AC IN RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT A L B C D E EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON/ OFF AC IN F G H I K J 5 Remote Control q POWER ON/OFF Switches Power ON/OFF. (This does not operate when POWER/STANDBY indicator of the main unit is off.) w RGB/PC Press this button to select RGB/PC as the source. → RGB/PC1 → RGB/PC2 → RGB/PC3 RGB/PC can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button on the monitor. The input switches as follows each time the button is pressed: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2→ VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1 ← e DVD / HD Press this button to select DVD/HD as the source. DVD/HD can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button on the monitor. The input switches as follows each time the button is pressed: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2→ VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1 ← r VIDEO Press this button to select VIDEO as the source. → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2 → VIDEO3 VIDEO can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button on the monitor. The input switches as follows each time the button is pressed: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2→ VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1 ← t PROCEED Press this button to access the OSM controls. Press this button during the display of the main menu to go to the sub menu. y CURSOR (L / M / � / �) Use these buttons to select items or settings and to adjust settings or switch the display patterns. u EXIT Press this button to exit the OSM controls in the main menu. Press this button during the display of the sub menu to return to the main menu. i POINTER Press this button to display the pointer. o ZOOM (+ /–) Enlarges or reduces the image. !0 VOLUME (+ /–) Adjusts the volume. !1 MUTE Mutes the sound. !2 WIDE The type of broadcast is detected automatically, and the recommended wide screen is set. 6 !3 DISPLAY Displays the source settings on the screen. !4 OFF TIMER Activates the off timer for the unit. !5 MULTI Press this button to select a screen mode from among single mode, side by side, and picture in picture. !6 SELECT Press this button to select the active picture in a multi screen mode. !7 AUTO ADJUST Press this button to adjust Fine Picture, Picture ADJ, Position, and Contrast automatically, or to switch the screen size to ZOOM mode automatically with the superimposed caption displayed fully only when the picture contains dark areas above and below the picture. !8 Remote control signal transmitter Transmits the remote control signals. !9 Remote Jack Insert the plug of the supplied remote cable here when using the supplied remote control in the wired condition. Battery Installation and Replacement Insert the 2 “AAA” batteries, making sure to set them in with the proper polarity. 1.Press and open the cover. 2.Align the batteries according to the (+) and (–) indication inside the case. 3.Replace the cover. 7 Using the wired remote control mode Connect the supplied remote cable to the remote control’s remote jack and the “REMOTE CONTROL” terminal on the monitor. When the cable is connected, the mode automatically switches to wired remote control. When the wired remote control mode is used, the remote control can be operated even if no batteries are loaded. Operating Range * Use the remote control within a distance of about 7 m/ 23ft. from the front of the monitor’s remote control sensor and at horizontal and vertical angles of up to approximately 30°. * The remote control operation may not function if the monitor’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light, or if there is an obstacle between the sensor and the remote control. Handling the remote control • Do not drop or mishandle the remote control. • Do not get the remote control wet. If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately. • Avoid heat and humidity. • When not using the remote control for a long period, remove the batteries. • Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types together. • Do not take apart the batteries, heat them, or throw them into a fire. • When using the remote control in the wireless condition, be sure to unplug the remote cable from the REMOTE CONTROL terminal on the monitor. EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON / OFF SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT AC IN RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON / OFF Remote Control Cable To Remote Jack POWER/STANDBY PROCEED INPUT SELECT DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ /EXIT VOLUME 30˚ 30˚ Approx. 7m/ 23ft 8 Installation RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G/Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 VCR or Laser Disc Player Document Camera DVD Player IBM VGA or Compatibles Personal computer with a digital RGB output Signal cable (supplied) To Mini D-Sub 15 pin connector on the plasma monitor To video inputs on the plasma monitor Monitor adapter for Macintosh Macintosh or Compatibles (Desk top type) 9 Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer Connecting your PC or Macintosh computer to your plasma monitor will enable you to display your computer’s screen image for an impressive presentation. The plasma monitor supports the signals described on page 47. To connect a PC, Macintosh or compatible graphics adapter, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and computer. 2. If your PC does not support XGA/SVGA/VGA you will need to install an XGA/SVGA/VGA graphics board. Consult your computer’s owner’s manual for your XGA/ SVGA/VGA configuration. If you need to install a new board, see the manual that comes with your new graphics board for installation instructions. 3. The plasma monitor provides signal compatibility up to VESA 1600�1200 (UXGA). However, it is not recommended to use this resolution due to image readability on the monitors 1365�768 native pixel resolution panel. 4. Use the signal cable that’s supplied to connect your PC or Macintosh computer to the plasma monitor. For Macintosh, use the monitor adapter to connect to your computer’s video port. 5. Turn on the plasma monitor and the computer. 6. If the plasma monitor goes blank after a period of inactivity, it may be caused by a screen saver installed on the computer you’ve connected to the plasma monitor. When using a Macintosh with the plasma monitor, the following four display standards are supported using the Macintosh adapter : 13" fixed mode 16" fixed mode 19" fixed mode 21" fixed mode The 19" fixed mode is recommended for the plasma monitor. Connections with Equipment that has a Digital Interface Connections can be made with equipment that is equipped with a digital interface compliant with the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standard. * Use a DVI 29-pin signal cable and the ferrite cores (supplied) when making connections to the RGB3 IN (DVI) connector of the main unit. Note that the RGB3 IN(DVI) terminal does not support analog RGB input source. Note: 1. Input TMDS signals conforming to DVI standards. The TMDS input corresponds to 1 link. 2. To maintain display quality, use a cable with a quality prescribed by DVI standards that is within 5 meters in length. Connecting Your Document Camera You can connect your plasma monitor to a document camera. To do so, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and document camera. 2. Use a standard video cable to connect your document camera to the Video input on your plasma monitor. 3. Turn on the plasma monitor and the document camera. Note: Refer to your document camera owner’s manual for more information about your camera’s video output requirements. Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player Use common RCA cables (not provided) to connect your VCR or laser disc player to your plasma monitor. To make these connections, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and VCR or laser disc player. 2. Connect one end of your RCA cable to the video output connector on the back of your VCR or laser disc player, connect the other end to the Video input on your plasma monitor. Use standard RCA audio patch cords to connect the audio from your VCR or laser disc player to your plasma monitor (if your VCR or laser disc player has this capability). Be careful to keep your right and left channel connections correct for stereo sound. 3. Turn on the plasma monitor and the VCR or laser disc player. Note: Refer to your VCR or laser disc player owner’s manual for more information about your equipment’s video output requirements. Connecting Your DVD Player You can connect your plasma monitor to a DVD player. To do so, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and DVD player. 2. Use a standard video cable to connect your DVD player to the Y, Cb, and Cr inputs on your plasma monitor. Or use the DVD-player’s S-Video output. Use a standard S-Video cable to connect to the S-Video input on the plasma monitor. 3. Turn on the plasma monitor and the DVD player. 10 External Speaker Connections External speakers may be connected to the plasma monitor to reproduce sound from VIDEO, DVD or RGB signal sources. External speakers may be connected directly to the SPEAKERS terminals or indirectly by connecting a stereo system amplifier to the audio outputs. CAUTION: Unplug the plasma monitor and all connected components before connecting external speakers. Use only speakers with 6-ohm impedance and a power input rating of 7 watts or more. RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON / OFF SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT AC IN LEFT RIGHT To connect external speakers directly to the plasma monitor: 1. Strip the ends of the speaker wires. 2. Press down the tabs below the SPEAKERS terminals, insert the speaker wire and release the tab to secure the speaker wire connection: [a] Connect the right speaker (located at right side of the monitor when viewed from the front) positive (+) wire to RIGHT +. [b] Connect the right speaker negative (–) wire to RIGHT –. [c] Connect the left speaker negative (–) wire to LEFT–. [d] Connect the left speaker positive (+) wire to LEFT+. 11 Pin Assignments and Signal Levels for 15 pin RGB (Analog) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 RGB 3 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 25 26 27 28 16 24 29 Signal (Analog) Red Green or sync-on-green Blue No connection Ground Red ground Green ground Blue ground No connection Sync signal ground No connection Bi-directional DATA (SDA) Horizontal sync or Composite sync Vertical sync Data clock Pin Configuration and Signal of the RGB 3 IN Connector (DVI Connector) The unit is equipped with a type of connector commonly used for both analog and digital. (Functionally, this cannot be used for an analog input.) (TMDS can be used for one link only.) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Signal (Digital) T.M.D.S Data 2 - T.M.D.S Data 2 + T.M.D.S Data 2 Shield No connection No connection DDC Clock DDC Data No connection T.M.D.S Data 1 - T.M.D.S Data 1 + T.M.D.S Data 1 Shield No connection No connection +5V Power Ground Hot Plug Detect T.M.D.S Data 0 - T.M.D.S Data 0 + T.M.D.S Data 0 Shield No connection No connection T.M.D.S Clock Shield T.M.D.S Clock + T.M.D.S Clock - No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection 12 POWER To turn the unit ON and OFF: 1. Plug the power cord into an active AC power outlet. 2. Press the POWER ON button (on the remote control) to turn on the unit. The monitor’s POWER/STANDBY indicator will light up (green) when the unit is on. 3. Press the POWER OFF button (on the remote control or the unit) to turn off the unit. The monitor’s POWER/STANDBY indicator turns red and the standby mode is set (only when turning off the unit with the remote control). VOLUME To adjust the volume: 1. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote control or the unit) to increase to the desired level. 2. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote control or the unit) to decrease to the desired level. MUTE To cancel the sound: Press the MUTE button on the remote control to cancel the sound; press again to restore. DISPLAY To check the settings: 1. The screen changes each time the DISPLAY button is pressed. 2. If the button is not pressed for approximately three seconds, the menu turns off. DIGITAL ZOOM Digital zoom specifies the picture position and enlarges the picture. 1. Press the POINTER button to display the pointer. ( ) To change the size of the picture: Press the ZOOM+ button and enlarge the picture. The pointer will change to resemble a magnifying glass. ( ) A press of the ZOOM- button will reduce the picture and return it to its original size. To change the picture position: Select the position with the LM� � buttons. 2. Press the POINTER button to delete the pointer. AUTO ADJUST To adjust the size or quality of the picture automatically: Press the AUTO ADJUST button. Information � AUTO ADJUST ON setting When RGB (still picture) input is selected ......Fine Picture, Picture ADJ, Position, and Contrast will be adjusted automatically. When RGB (motion picture), VIDEO, or Y/Pb/Pr (component) input is selected ......The screen size switches to ZOOM mode automatically with the superimposed caption displayed fully only when the picture contains dark areas above and below the picture. Basic Operations 13 OFF TIMER To set the off timer: The off timer can be set to turn the power off after 30, 60, 90 or 120 minutes. 1. Press the OFF TIMER button to start the timer at 30 minutes. 2. Press the OFF TIMER button to the desired time. 3. The timer starts when the menu turns off. → 30 → 60 → 90 → 120 → 0 OFF TIMER30 To check the remaining time: 1. Once the off timer has been set, press the OFF TIMER button once. 2. The remaining time is displayed, then turns off after a few seconds. 3. When five minutes remain the remaining time appears until it reaches zero. OFF TIMER28 To cancel the off timer: 1. Press the OFF TIMER button twice in a row. 2. The off timer is canceled. OFF TIMER0 Note: After the power is turned off with the off timer ... A slight current is still supplied to the monitor. When you are leaving the room or do not plan to use the system for a long period of time, turn off the power of the monitor. 14 Watching with a wide screen (manual) With this function, you can select one of four screen sizes. When watching videos or digital video discs 1. Press the WIDE button on the remote control. 2. Within 3 seconds ... Press the WIDE button again. The screen size switches as follows: → ZOOM → NORMAL → FULL → STADIUM ZOOM size screen The picture is expanded in the horizontal and vertical direction, maintaining the original proportions. * Use this for theater size (wide) movies, etc. NORMAL size screen (4:3) The normal size screen is displayed. * The picture has the same size as video pictures with a 4 : 3 aspect ratio. FULL size screen The image is expanded in the horizontal direction. * Images compressed in the horizontal direction (“squeezed images”) are expanded in the horizontal direction and displayed on the entire screen. (Normal images are expanded in the horizontal direction.) STADIUM size screen The picture is expanded in the horizontal and vertical directions at different ratios. * Use this for watching normal video programs (4:3) with a wide screen. When watching high definition video source 1. Press the WIDE button on the remote control. FULL size screen (16 : 9) The full size screen is displayed. * The picture has the same size as video pictures (16 : 9). WIDE Operations 15 Watching computer images with a wide screen Switch to the wide screen mode to expand the 4 : 3 image to fill the entire screen. 1.Press the WIDE button on the remote control. 2.Within 3 seconds ... Press the WIDE button again. The screen size switches as follows: → NORMAL → FULL NORMAL size screen (4:3 or SXGA 5:4) The picture has the same size as the normal computer image. FULL size screen The image is expanded in the horizontal direction. When wide signals are input. FULL size screen When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” The screen size switches as follows: → TRUE → FULL TRUE size screen (VGA, SVGA 4:3) The image is true resolution. FULL size screen The image is expanded in the horizontal and vertical direction. When wide signals are input. TRUE The image is true resolution. FULL Information � Supported resolution See page 47 for details on the display output of the various VESA signal standards supported by the monitor. � “PICTURE SIZE” setting When the setting of “PICTURE SIZE” is OFF, the size of RGB-input pictures will be TRUE in place of NORMAL. � When 852 (848) dot � 480 line wide VGA* signals with a vertical frequency of 60 Hz and horizontal frequency of 31.7 (31.0) kHz are in- put Select an appropriate setting for RGB SELECT mode referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page 47. * “ IBM PC/AT” and “VGA” are registered trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States. 16 Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the same time * An RGB-input picture may not be displayed in these modes, depending on the input signal specifications. 1. Press the MULTI button to select a screen mode from among single mode, side by side, and picture in picture. Side by side 1 VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 A B Press the cursor buttons � � on the remote control to switch either side by side 1 (with �) or side by side 2 (with �). Note: Picture A and B on the above screen are not always of the same height. Side by side 2 VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 Sub screen Main screen Picture in picture VIDEO1 Sub screen Main screen RGB/PC1 Press the cursor buttons � � on the remote control to switch the position of the sub screen. VIDEO1 Sub screen Main screen RGB/PC1 2. If you wish to switch the setting of the picture, press the SELECT button to make the desired picture active. Each press of the SELECT button changes the selection of the active picture. MULTI SCREEN Operations VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 A B VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 A B Selecting the input signals to be displayed 1. Press the SELECT button to make the desired picture active. 2. Press the RGB/PC, VIDEO, or DVD/HD button. Each press of the button changes the selection of the input signal. The INPUT SELECT button on the monitor can also be used to change the selection. Adjusting the OSM controls 1. Press the PROCEED button to display the MAIN MENU. 2. Adjust the setting to your preference. For details, see “OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls” on page 17. Note: During multi mode, Auto Adjust does not affect the screen. Information � Positioning on the screen (for side by side) Depending on the input-signal selection, positioning of the picture is settled as follows. Pictures displayed on the left ........VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3, HD1/ DVD1/DTV1, or HD2/DVD2/ DTV2 Pictures displayed on the right ......RGB/PC1, RGB/PC2, RGB/PC3 � Positioning on the screen (for picture in picture) Pictures displayed Main screen .... RGB/PC1, RGB/PC2, RGB/PC3 Sub screen ...... VIDEO1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, HD 1/DVD 1/DTV 1, or HD 2/ DVD 2/DTV 2 � Multi screen operations may not function depending on the type of the RGB signals. 17 Menu Operations The OSM window is displayed with respect to the screen as shown on the diagram. * Depending on the screen’s mode, the OSM may be displayed differently. In the explanation, the OSM section is shown close up. MAIN MENU PICTURE SOUND SCREEN FUNCTION OPTIONS INFORMATION SEL. OK EXIT EXIT PROCEED The following describes how to use the menus and the selected items. 1. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU. MAIN MENU PICTURE SOUND SCREEN FUNCTION OPTIONS INFORMATION SEL. OK EXIT EXIT PROCEED 2. Press the cursor buttons L M on the remote control to highlight the menu you wish to enter. 3. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to select a submenu or item. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 4. Adjust the level or change the setting of the selected item by using the cursor buttons � � on the remote control. OSM(On Screen Menu) Controls 5. The change is stored until you adjust it again. 6. Repeat steps 2 – 5 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control to return to the main menu. Note: The main menu disappears by pressing the EXIT button. 18 Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset PICTURE CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast. Center Yes BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness. Center Yes SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness. Center Yes COLOR Adjusts the color. Center Yes TINT Adjusts the tint. Center Yes PICTURE MODE Sets the picture mode according to the VIDEO environment and MEMORY Yes image software. COLOR TEMP Adjusts the color temperature and white balance. 2*1 Yes NR Reduces noise visible in image. OFF Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset SOUND BASS Sets the bass. Center Yes TREBLE Sets the treble. Center Yes BALANCE Sets the left/right balance. Center Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset SCREEN V-POSITION Adjusts the vertical position. Center Yes H-POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position. Center Yes V-HEIGHT Adjusts the vertical size. Min Yes H-WIDTH Adjusts the horizontal size. Min Yes AUTO PICTURE Turn this on to have the monitor automatically adjust “FINE PICTURE” OFF*1 No and “PICTURE ADJ”. FINE PICTURE Adjusts for flickering on the computer image. Min*1 Yes PICTURE ADJ. Adjusts for striped patterns on the computer image. Center*1 Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset FUNCTION OSM Turns the on-screen menu (screen mode, etc.) off (when set to “OFF”). ON Yes When set to “ON”, the on-screen menu is displayed. OSM ADJ. Adjusts the vertical and horizontal positions of the menu display. 1 Yes POWER MGT Sets the monitor for use as an energy-saving display when used with a OFF Yes computer. GRAY LEVEL In case of 4 : 3, sets the luminance of both sides. 3 Yes CINEMA MODE Sets the picture to suit the movie. ON Yes RGB3 ADJ. Adjusts the picture when the picture input from the RGB3 input 1 Yes terminal is distorted. LONG LIFE Sets the picture to reduce burn-in of the display. *2 Yes RESET Resets all the settings (PICTURE, SOUND, SCREEN, FUNCTION, — — etc.) to the factory default values. Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset OPTION AUDIO INPUT Sets the allocation of the audio connectors. *3 Yes BNC SELECT Sets the BNC connectors. RGB Yes RGB SELECT Sets the appropriate mode for the computer image. AUTO Yes RGB (VGA signals), VIDEO (Moving picture), WIDE (WIDE VGA) DTV. HD SELECT Sets the digital broadcasting (1080A,1080B) or the High Vision (1035I). 1080B No PICTURE SIZE Sets the picture size for RGB input. ON Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset INFORMATION FREQUENCY Used to check the frequency and synchronizing polarities of the signal — — currently being inputted. LANGUAGE Sets the language of the menus (Japanese, English, German, French, English No Swedish, Italian or Spanish). COLOR SYSTEM Sets the VIDEO format (AUTO1, AUTO2, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, AUTO1 No SECAM, 4.43 NTSC or 3.58 NTSC). *1 RGB/PC only. *2 PLE: AUTO ORBITER: OFF INVERSE: OFF *3 AUDIO1: VIDEO1 AUDIO2: HD/DVD1 AUDIO3: RGB1 19 Picture Settings Menu Adjusting the picture The contrast, brightness, sharpness, color and tint can be adjusted as desired. Example: Adjusting the contrast Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “CONTRAST”. PICTURE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to adjust the contrast. CONTRAST * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current setting is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the adjustment is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Note: If “CAN NOT ADJUST” appears ... When trying to enter the PICTURE submenu, make sure PICTURE MODE is set to MEMORY. Information � Picture adjustment screen CONTRAST .... Changes the picture’s contrast. BRIGHTNESS. Changes the picture’s brightness. SHARPNESS .. Changes the picture’s sharpness. Adjusts picture detail of VIDEO display. COLOR ...........Changes the color density. TINT ................Changes the picture’s tint. Adjust for natural colored skin, background, etc. � Adjusting the computer image Only the contrast and brightness can be adjusted when a computer signal is connected. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the “PICTURE MODE” settings. 20 Setting the picture mode according to the brightness of the room There are four picture modes that can be used effectively according to the environment in which you are viewing the display. Example: Setting the “THEATER” mode Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE MODE”. PICTURE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. To set to “THEATER” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “THEATER”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → MEMORY ↔ THEATER ↔ NORMAL ↔ RESET ← PICTURE MODE THEATER : * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the adjustment is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Types of picture modes MEMORY ........ The last picture adjustments are stored here. THEATER ........ Set this mode when watching video in a dark room. This mode provides darker, finer pictures, like the screen in movie theaters. CONTRAST = 80% for RESET mode BRIGHTNESS = 95% for RESET mode NORMAL ......... Set this mode when watching video in a bright room. This mode provides dynamic pictures with distinct differences between light and dark sections. CONTRAST = 96% for RESET mode RESET ............ Use this to reset the picture to the factory default settings. 21 Setting the color temperature Use this procedure to set color tone produced by the plasma display. Example: Setting “1” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “COLOR TEMP.”. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to select “1”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ↔ PRO ← * See page 22 to set “PRO”. COLOR TEMP. 1 : * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Setting the color temperature 1 ......................High (bluer) 2......................... Middle (Standard) 3 ......................Low (redder) � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. 22 Adjusting the color to the desired quality Use this procedure to adjust the white balance for bright pictures and dark pictures to achieve the desired color quality. Example: Adjusting the “WHITE BALANCE” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “COLOR TEMP.”. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to select “PRO”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ↔ PRO ← PRO : COLOR TEMP. * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Press the PROCEED button. The “WHITE BALANCE” screen appears. 5. Use the L and M buttons to select “RED-GAIN”. W H I T E BA L A N C E GAIN RED GREEN BLUE BIAS RED GREEN BLUE SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 6. Adjust the white balance using the � and � buttons. R-GAIN * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current setting is set and the previous screen reappears. 7. Once the adjustment is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Adjusting the white balance RGB-GAIN ....... White balance adjustment for signal level RGB-BIAS ....... White balance adjustment for black level � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. 23 Reducing noise in the picture Use these settings if the picture has noise due to poor reception or when playing video tapes on which the picture quality is poor. Example: Setting “NR-3” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “NR”. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to select “NR-3”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → OFF ↔ NR-1 ↔ NR-2 ↔ NR-3 ← NR NR-3 : * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � NR * “NR” stands for Noise Reduction. * This function reduces noise in the picture. � Types of noise reduction There are three types of noise reduction. Each has a different level of noise reduction. The effect becomes stronger as the number increases (in the order NR-1 → NR-2 → NR-3). OFF ...............Turns the noise reduction function off. 24 Sound Settings Menu Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance The treble, bass and left/right balance can be adjusted to suit your tastes. Example: Adjusting the bass Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “SOUND”, then press the PROCEED button. The “SOUND” screen appears. 2. To adjust the bass ... Use the L and M buttons to select “BASS”. S O U N D BASS TREBLE BALANCE L R SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Adjust the bass using the � and � buttons. S O U N D BASS TREBLE BALANCE L R SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. To continue adjusting the sound ... Repeat from step 2. 4. Once the adjustment is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Note : If “CAN NOT ADJUST” appears... Set “AUDIO INPUT” on the OPTION menu correctly. Information � Sound settings menu BASS ..............Changes the level of low frequency sound. TREBLE ..........Changes the level of high frequency sound. BALANCE ....... Changes the balance of the left and right channels. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. 25 3. Adjust using the � and � buttons. V–POSITION * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current setting is set and the previous screen reappears. To continue making other computer image adjustments ... Repeat from step 2. 4. Once all adjustments are completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � When “AUTO PICTURE” is “OFF” SCREEN MODE V–POSITION H–POSITION V–HEIGHT H–WIDTH AUTO PICTURE FINE PICTURE PICTURE ADJ. FULL : OFF : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT When Auto Picture is off, the Fine Picture and the Picture ADJ items are displayed so that you can adjust them. Screen Settings Menu Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj The position of the image can be adjusted and flickering of the image can be corrected. Example: Adjusting the vertical position in the normal mode Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “SCREEN”, then press the PROCEED button. The “SCREEN” menu appears. Default settings (when RGB/PC is selected) SCREEN MODE V–POSITION H–POSITION V–HEIGHT H–WIDTH AUTO PICTURE FINE PICTURE PICTURE ADJ. NORMAL : OFF : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT * The settings on the SCREEN menu are not preset at the factory. To select a mode ... Use the � and � buttons to select a mode. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → NORMAL ↔ FULL ← * The mode can also be switched by pressing the “WIDE” button on the remote control. 2. To adjust the vertical position ... Use the L and M buttons to select “V-POSITION”. SCREEN MODE H–POSITION V–HEIGHT H–WIDTH AUTO PICTURE FINE PICTURE PICTURE ADJ. NORMAL : OFF : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT V–POSITION 26 Information � Adjusting the Auto Picture ON ...................The Picture ADJ and Fine Picture adjustments are made automatically. OFF .................The Picture ADJ and Fine Picture adjustments are made manually. � Adjusting the position of the image V-POSITION ... Adjusts the vertical position of the image. H-POSITION ... Adjusts the horizontal position of the image. V-HEIGHT ....... Adjusts the vertical size of the image. (Except for STADIUM mode) H-WIDTH ......... Adjusts the horizontal size of the image. (Except for STADIUM mode) FINE PICTURE*.. Adjusts for flickering. PICTURE ADJ* .... Adjusts for striped patterns on the image. * The Picture ADJ and Fine Picture features are available only when the “Auto Picture” is off. * The AUTO PICTURE, FINE PICTURE and PICTURE ADJ. are not available for VIDEO and HD/ DVD source. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults except for Auto Picture. Function Settings Menu Setting the on-screen menu When using the monitor for presentations, etc., the monitor can be set so that the input source, screen mode, etc., do not appear. Example: Turning the on-screen menu mode off Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “OSM”. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : 1 : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To turn the on-screen menu mode off ... Use the � and � buttons to select “OFF”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: ON ↔ OFF FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE OFF 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � OSM modes ON ...................The on-screen menu appears. OFF .................The on-screen menu does not appear. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. 27 Adjusting the position of the menu display Use these operations to adjust the position of the menus that appear on the screen. Example: Adjusting the position of the menu display Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” menu appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “OSM ADJ.” F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 1 : 3. To adjust the position... Adjust using the � and � buttons. OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT F U N C T I O N F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 2 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET LONG LIFE RESET 1 : RGB3 ADJ. 4. Once all adjustments are completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Adjusting the position of the menu display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. The position can be set between 1 and 9. 28 Setting the power management for computer images This energy-saving (power management) function automatically reduces the monitor’s power consumption if no operation is performed for a certain amount of time. Example: Turning the power management function on Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “POWER MGT”. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To turn the power management function on ... Use the � and � buttons to select “ON”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: ON ↔ OFF FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 ON 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Power management function * The power management function automatically reduces the monitor’s power consumption if the computer’s keyboard or mouse is not operated for a certain amount of time. This function can be used when using the monitor with a computer conforming to the VESA DPMS format. * If the computer’s power is not turned on or if the computer and selector tuner are not properly connected, the system is set to the off state. * For instructions on using the computer’s power management function, refer to the computer’s operating instructions. � Power management settings ON ...................In this mode the power management function is turned on. OFF .................In this mode the power management function is turned off. � Power management function and POWER/ STANDBY indicator The POWER/STANDBY indicator indicates the status of the power management function. See page 29 for indicator status and description. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. 29 POWER/STANDBY indicator Power management mode On Standby Suspend Off POWER/STANDBY indicator Green Orange Red Red Description Horizontal and vertical synchronizing signals are present from the computer. No horizontal synchronizing signals are sent from the computer. No vertical synchronizing signals are sent from the computer. No horizontal or vertical synchronizing signals are sent from the computer. Turning the picture back on Picture already on. Operate the keyboard or mouse. The picture reappears immediately. Operate the keyboard or mouse. The picture reappears, but more time is required than from the standby mode. Operate the keyboard or mouse. The picture reappears, but more time is required than from the standby mode or suspend mode. Power management operating status Not activated. Activated. Activated. Activated. 30 Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen Use this procedure to set the gray level for the parts on the screen on which nothing is displayed when the screen is set to the 4:3 size. Example: Adjusting the “GRAY LEVEL” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “GRAY LEVEL”. F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To adjust the “GRAY LEVEL”... Use the � and � buttons to adjust the GRAY LEVEL. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 9 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � GRAY LEVEL This adjusts the brightness of the black (the gray level) for the sides of the screen. The standard is 0 (black). The level can be adjusted from 0 to 15. The factory setting is 3 (dark gray). � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting the picture to suit the movie The film image is automatically discriminated and projected in an image mode suited to the picture. [NTSC, 480I (60Hz), 1035I (60Hz), 1080I (60Hz) only] Example: Setting the “CINEMA MODE” to “OFF” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “CINEMA MODE”. FU N C TIO N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To set the CINEMA MODE to “OFF” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “OFF”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: → ON ↔ OFF ← F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 OFF : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � CINEMA MODE ON ...................Automatic discrimination of the image and projection in cinema mode. OFF ................... Cinema mode does not function. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. 31 Setting RGB3 ADJ. When the picture input from the RGB3 input terminal is distorted, select the most appropriate setting from among “1”, “2”, and “3”. Example: Setting “2” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “RGB3 ADJ.”. F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To select “2”... Use the � and � buttons to select “2”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � buton is pressed: → 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ← F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 2 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � When you adjust the RGB3 ADJ. The position of the menu display will change. In such a case, be sure to adjust the position. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Reducing burn-in of the screen The brightness of the screen, the position of the picture, and positive/negative mode are adjusted to reduce burn- in of the screen. Example: Setting “PLE” to “LOCK” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then proceed as follows. 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “LONG LIFE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “LONG LIFE” screen appears. 3. Use the L and M buttons to select “PLE”, then use the � and � buttons to select “LOCK”. The mode switch changes as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: AUTO ↔ LOCK 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the FUNCTION menu. To exit the main menu, press the EXIT button twice. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : 1 : RGB3 ADJ. SEL. RETURN EXIT PROCEED OK LONG LIFE RESET LONG LIFE PLE ORBITER INVERSE OFF OFF LOCK : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 32 Information � PLE AUTO .............. The brightness of the screen is adjusted automatically to suit the picture quality. LOCK ..............The brightness level is set to minimum. � ORBITER ON ...................The picture moves around the screen intermittently. OFF .................Orbiter mode does not function. � INVERSE ON ..................... The picture is displayed alternately between positive image and negative image. OFF .................Inverse mode does not function. WT ..................The entire screen turns white. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” from the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Resetting to the default values Use these operations to restore all the picture adjustments, audio settings, to the factory default values. Refer to page 18 for items to be reset. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “RESET”, then press the PROCEED button. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL LONG LIFE CINEMA MODE RESET ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED 1 : RGB3 ADJ. The “RESET” screen appears. 3. Use the L and M buttons to select “RESET”, then press the PROCEED button. RESET RESET RETURN OK RETURN EXIT PROCEED SETTING NOW RESET When the “SETTING NOW” screen disappears, the screen will be restored to the previous “RESET” mode, then all the settings are restored to the default values. 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. 33 Option Settings Menu Setting the allocation of the audio connectors Setting the AUDIO 1, 2, and 3 connectors to the desired input. Example: Setting “AUDIO 1” to “VIDEO 2” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “AUDIO 1”. OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE VIDEO1 RGB1 RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT HD/DVD1 3. To set the AUDIO1 to “VIDEO2”... Use the � and � buttons to select “VIDEO2”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: → VIDEO1 ↔ VIDEO2 ↔ VIDEO3 ↔ HD/DVD1 ↔ RGB/PC1 ↔ RGB/PC2 ↔ RGB/PC3 ← OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO2 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � AUDIO INPUT A single audio input cannot be selected as the audio channel for more than one input terminal. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting the BNC connectors Select whether to set the input of the 5 BNC connectors to RGB or component. Example: Set the BNC SELECT mode to “COMP.” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “BNC SELECT”. OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set the BNC SELECT mode to “COMP.”... Use the � and � buttons to select “COMP.”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: RGB ↔ COMP. OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE COMP. AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. 34 Information � BNC SELECT RGB ................ Uses the 5BNC terminal for RGB input. COMP. .............Use the 3BNC terminal for component input. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select screen With the computer image, select the RGB Select mode for a moving image such as (video) mode, wide mode or digital broadcast. Example: Setting the “RGB SELECT” mode to “MOTION ” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “RGB SELECT”. AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT OPTION VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set the RGB select mode to “MOTION” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “MOTION”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: → AUTO ↔ STILL ↔ MOTION ↔ WIDE1 ↔ WIDE2 ↔ DTV ← OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB MOTION 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. 35 Information � RGB SELECT modes One of these 6 modes must be selected in order to display the following signals correctly. AUTO .............. Select the suitable mode for the specifications of input signals as listed in the table “Computer input signals supported by this system” on page 47. STILL ..............To display VESA standard signals. (Use this mode for a still image from a computer.) MOTION..........The video signal (from a scan converter) will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion image from a computer.) WIDE1............. When an 852 dot� 480 line signal with a horizontal frequency of 31.7kHz is input, the image may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB SELECT to WIDE1. WIDE2............. When an 848 dot� 480 line signal with a horizontal frequency of 31.0 kHz is input, the image may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB SELECT to WIDE2. DTV .................Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting (480P). See page 47 for the details of the above settings. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical lines of the input high definition image is 1035 or 1080. Example: Setting the “1080B” mode to “1035I” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “HD SELECT”. OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set the HD SELECT mode to “1035I” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “1035I”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: →1080A ↔ 1080B ↔ 1035I ← OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1035I ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � HD SELECT modes These 3 modes are not displayed in correct image automatically. 1080A ............... Special Digital broadcasts (for example : DTC100) 1080B ............... Standard digital broadcasts 1035I ...............Japanese “High Vision” signal format 36 Setting the picture size for RGB input signals Use this procedure to switch the setting to “ON” or “OFF”. Example: Setting the “ON” mode to “OFF” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE SIZE”. O P T I O N AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set PICTURE SIZE mode to “OFF”... Use the � and � buttons to select “OFF”. The mode switches as follows when the � or � buttons are pressed: ON ↔ OFF OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B OFF : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � PICTURE SIZE ON ..................... For RGB Input: “NORMAL” and “FULL” can be selected for Wide- Screen switching. OFF ................... For RGB Input: “TRUE” and “FULL” can be selected for Wide- Screen switching. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Information Menu Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals, and resolution Use this function to check the frequencies and polarities of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “INFORMATION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “INFORMATION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “FREQUENCY”, then press the PROCEED button. INFORMATION FREQUENCY LANGUAGE COLOR SYSTEM SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED 3. The frequency is displayed. F R E QU E N C Y H. FREQ V. FREQ H. POL V. POL 37.5KHz 75.0Hz NEG. NEG. : : : : MODE RESOLUTION 8 640�480 : : RETURN EXIT * Press the EXIT button to return to the previous screen. 4. Once you have checked the frequency ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. 37 Setting the language for the menus The menu display can be set to one of seven languages: Japanese, English, German, French, Swedish, Italian or Spanish. Example: Setting the menu display to “DEUTSCH” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “INFORMATION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “INFORMATION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “LANGUAGE”, then press the PROCEED button. INFORMATION FREQUENCY LANGUAGE COLOR SYSTEM SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED The “LANGUAGE” screen appears. 3. To select “ DEUTSCH ” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “ DEUTSCH ”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → ENGLISH ↔ DEUTSCH ↔ FRANÇAIS ← → ↔ SVENSKA ↔ ITALIANO ↔ ESPAÑOL ← LANGUAGE LANGUAGE DEUTSCH : ADJ. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED 4. Press the PROCEED button. The display language is switched to Deutsch. 5. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Language settings ENGLISH ........ English DEUTSCH....... German FRANÇAIS ...... French ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish ITALIANO ........ Italian SVENSKA ....... Swedish .............. Japanese Setting the video signal format Use these operations to set the video signal format. Example: Setting the video signal format to “3.58 NTSC” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “INFORMATION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “INFORMATION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “COLOR SYSTEM”, then press the PROCEED button. I N F O R M AT I O N FREQUENCY LANGUAGE COLOR SYSTEM SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED The “COLOR SYSTEM” screen appears. C O L O R S Y S T E M COLOR SYSTEM AUTO1 : ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. To select “3.58 NTSC” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “3.58 NTSC”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → AUTO1 ↔ AUTO2 ↔ 3.58NTSC ↔ 4.43NTSC ← → SECAM ↔ PAL-M ↔ PAL-N ↔ PAL60 ↔ PAL ← COLOR SYSTEM COLOR SYSTEM 3.58NTSC : ADJ. RETURN EXIT 38 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. The color system is set to “3.58 NTSC”. Information � Video signal formats Different countries use different formats for video signals. Set to the format used in your current country. AUTO1/2 ......... The video signals are automatically detected and the format is set accordingly. AUTO1: 3.58NTSC, 4.43NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL60 AUTO2: PAL-M, PAL-N, 3.58NTSC PAL (B, G) ....... This is the standard format used mainly in the United Kingdom and Germany. SECAM............. This is the standard format used mainly in France and Russia. 4.43 NTSC, PAL60.............. This format is used for videos in countries using PAL and SECAM video signals. 3.58 NTSC ...... This is the standard format used mainly in Japan and the United States. PAL-M ............. This is the standard format used mainly in Brazil. PAL-N .............. This is the standard format used mainly in Argentina. 39 External Control Application These specifications cover the communications control of the plasma monitor by external equipment. Connections Connections are made as described below. plasma monitor External equipment e.g., Personal computer 1) Connector on the plasma monitor side: EXTERNAL CONTROL connector. Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male No. Pin Name 1 No Connection 2 RXD (Receive data) 3 TXD (Transmit data) 4 DTR (DTE side ready) 5 GND 6 DSR (DCE side ready) 7 RTS (Ready to send) 8 CTS (Clear to send) 9 No Connection 1 5 9 6 2 3 4 7 8 2) Connector on the external equipment side: Serial port (RS-232C) connector. See the specifications of the equipment that is to be connected for the type of connector and the pin assignment. 3) Wiring Use a crossed (reverse) cable. Wire the cable so that each pair of data lines cross between the two devices. These data line pairs are RXD (Receive data) and TXD (Transmit data), DTR (DTE side ready) and DSR (DCE side ready), and RTS (Ready to send) and CTS (Clear to send). Communication Parameters (1) Communication system Asynchronous (2) Interface RS-232C (3) Baud rate 9600 bps (4) Data length 8 bits (5) Parity Odd (6) Stop bit 1 bit (7) Communication code Hex 40 Communication Format Command 1 Unit ID 1 Unit ID 2 Command 2 Data length Data Check sum 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit Command 1 Command 1, along with command 2, is a number used to distinguish each command. In the case of ACK, when the lower order 4 bits is FH (as in 3FH and 7FH), this indicates that the commands and data of the supported equipment have been received. When the lower order 4 bits is BH (as in 3BH and 7BH), this indicates that unsupported commands and data have been received. Unit ID 1 and Unit ID 2 Unit ID 1 and unit ID 2 are numbers used to identify the equipment that is to be connected. 60H is used for the plasma monitor and 80H is used for external control equipment such as a personal computer. 1) Unit ID 1: Indicates the equipment sending the signal 2) Unit ID 2: Indicates the equipment receiving the signal Command 2 Command 2, along with command 1, is a number used to distinguish each command. Check Sum (CKS), Error Processing, and ACK 1) The check sum described below and RS-232C odd parity are used together for a check of the received data. The check sum is the lower order 8 bits of one frame of sent or received data comprising the sum total of Command 1, Unit ID 1 and 2, Command 2, Data Length, and Data. Check Sum Example DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 01H 08H Command 1 Unit ID 1 Unit ID 2 Command 2 Data Length Data Check Sum Total 208H L 2) Error Processing • When the communication interval is vacant for more than 4 ms, thereafter a received Command 1 will be recognized. If, at this time, meaningful data cannot be recognized, that data will not be recognized (as valid data). • An ACK will not be returned unless the receive data error, the check sum error, and the receive data are all taken in. 41 Command Reference List CMD1 CMD2 LEN 01. Power ON 9FH 4EH 00H 02. Power OFF 9FH 4FH 00H 03. Input Switch Change DFH 47H 01H 04. VOLUME Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 05. SCREEN MODE Select DFH 51H 01H 06. AUDIO Mute On 9FH 3EH 00H 07. AUDIO Mute Off 9FH 3FH 00H 08. OSM Select DFH 58H 01H 09. Color Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 10. TINT Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 11. SHARPNESS Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 12. CONTRAST Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 13. BRIGHT Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 14. Input MODE Request 1FH 41H 00H 15. RESET 1FH 54H 00H 16. COLOR TEMP SELECT DFH 00H 01H 17. RED Gain Data DFH 7FH 04H 18. GREEN Gain Data DFH 7FH 04H 19. BLUE Gain Data DFH 7FH 04H 20. Multi Screen Select DFH 07H 01H 21. VIDEO ADJ Request 1FH 45H 00H 22. Audio Select Set DFH 70H 02H 23. Audio Select Request 1FH 6FH 00H 24. LONG LIFE Set DFH 6BH 03H 25. Failure Mode Request 1FH 3FH 00H 01. Power ON Function The external control equipment switches on the power of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 4EH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the power is switched on. 3FH 60H 80H 4EH 00H CKS NOTE: Do not set the Power ON or Power OFF command continuously. 02. Power OFF Function The external control equipment switches off the power of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 4FH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the power is switched off. 3FH 60H 80H 4FH 00H CKS NOTE: Do not set the Power ON or Power OFF command continuously. 03. Input Switch Change Function The external control equipment switches the input of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 : Input Select 01H: Video1 02H: Video2 03H: Video3 05H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV1) 06H: HD2 (DTV2) 07H: RGB1/PC1 08H: RGB2/PC2 0CH: RGB3/PC3 ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the input is switched. 3FH 60H 80H 47H 00H CKS 04. VOLUME Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the VOLUME gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00 USER SOUND Gain Flag 05H DATA01 VOLUME Gain Flag 01H DATA02 VOLUME Gain 00H: Step 0 0AH: Step 10 (Default) 2AH: Step 42 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00 USER SOUND Gain Flag 05H DATA01 VOLUME Gain Flag 01H 05. SCREEN MODE Select Function The external control equipment switches the screen mode of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 02H : STADIUM 03H : ZOOM 04H : NORMAL 05H : FULL 06H : TRUE (REAL) ACK 7FH 60H 80H 51H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 02H : STADIUM 03H : ZOOM 04H : NORMAL 05H : FULL 06H : TRUE (REAL) 42 Operation 06. AUDIO Mute On Function The external control equipment switches on AUDIO Mute of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H CKS ACK 3FH 60H 80H 3EH 00H CKS 07. AUDIO Mute Off Function The external control equipment switches off AUDIO Mute of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H CKS ACK 3FH 60H 80H 3FH 00H CKS 08. OSM Select Function The external control equipment switches on or off the on-screen menu (OSM) of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 58H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 01H : On-Screen menu On 02H : On-Screen menu Off ACK 7FH 60H 80H 58H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 01H : On-Screen menu On 02H : On-Screen menu Off On-Screen menu On/Off is equivalent to the On-screen menu On/Off function of the convenient function settings. *Operation is as described in the table below. 09. COLOR Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the COLOR gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: COLOR Gain Flag 04H DATA02: COLOR Gain E0H: -32 * COLOR Gain is from -22 (EAH) to +22 (16H) only during video. FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: COLOR Gain Flag 04H 10.TINT Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the TINT gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: TINT Gain Flag 05H DATA02: TINT Gain E0H: -32 * TINT Gain is from -22 (EAH) to +22 (16H) only during video. FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: TINT Gain Flag 05H On-Screen Menu (OSM) Display of items and adjustments on the menu When screen menu is ON Yes Yes Yes No Volume display, input display, and screen size display When screen menu is OFF When screen menu is ON When screen menu is OFF Remote control operation Personal computer control operation No No Yes No 43 11. SHARPNESS Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the SHARPNESS gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: SHARPNESS Gain Flag 06H DATA02: SHARPNESS Gain F0H: -16 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 10H:+16 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: SHARPNESS Gain Flag 06H 12. CONTRAST Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the CONTRAST gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: CONTRAST Gain Flag 07H DATA02: CONTRAST Gain CCH: -52 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 14H: +20 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: CONTRAST Gain Flag 07H 13. BRIGHT Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the BRIGHT gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BRIGHT Gain Flag 08H DATA02: BRIGHT Gain E0H: -32 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BRIGHT Gain Flag 08H 14. Input MODE Request Function The display returns the current input information by the external control equipment’ s request. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 41H 00H CKS ACK 7FH 60H 80H 41H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: Input Select 01H: Video1 02H: Video2 03H: Video3 04H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV1) 05H: RGB1/PC1 06H: RGB2/PC2 0AH:DVD (DVD1) 0CH:HD2 (DTV2) 0DH:DVD2 0EH:RGB3/PC3 15. RESET Function The external control equipment resets the user adjustment of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 54H 00H CKS ACK 3FH 60H 80H 54H 00H CKS 16. COLOR TEMP SELECT Function The external control equipment changes the COLOR TEMP of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 00H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 00H: 1 01H: 2 02H: 3 03H: PRO ACK 7FH 60H 80H 00H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: 00H: 1 01H: 2 02H: 3 03H: PRO NOTE: Set so that at the selection of 1, 2, or 3 of COLOR TEMP change of the following R/G/B GAIN data cannot be accepted. 44 17. RED Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the RED Gain Data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 04H DATA00 to DATA03 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: RED Gain Flag 01H DATA02: RED Gain 1 (Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: RED Gain 2 (Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: RED Gain Flag 01H 18. GREEN Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the GREEN Gain Data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 04H DATA00 to DATA03 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: GREEN Gain Flag 02H DATA02: GREEN Gain 1 (Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: GREEN Gain2 (Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: GREEN Gain Flag 02H 19. BLUE Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the BLUE Gain Data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 04H DATA00 to DATA03 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BLUE Gain Flag 03H DATA02: BLUE Gain1(Bias) D8H:-40 FFH:-1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: BLUE Gain2(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH:-1 00H: 0 IEH:+30 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BLUE Gain Flag 03H 20. Multi Screen Select Function The external control equipment selects single screen mode or multi screen mode of the display. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 07H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: Multi Screen 00: Single screen 01: Side by side 1 (Left screen bigger) 02: Side by side 2 (Left screen smaller) 03: Picture in Picture sub screen L 04: Picture in Picture sub screen R ACK The display returns the following ACK. 7FH 60H 80H 07H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: Multi Screen 00: Single screen 01: Side by side 1 (Left screen bigger) 02: Side by side 2 (Left screen smaller) 03: Picture in Picture sub screen L 04: Picture in Picture sub screen R When other commands (except POWER OFF) are sent while the screens are switching with this command, the other command will be returned as “Not Available” until screen switching is finished. 45 21. VIDEO ADJ Request Function The display returns the video adjustments information by the external control equipment’s request. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 45H 00H CKS ACK 7FH 60H 80H 45H 0CH DATA00 to DATA0B CKS DATA00: RED Gain(Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA01: GREEN Gain(Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA02: BLUE Gain(Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: COLOR Gain E0H: -32 * COLOR Gain is from -22 (EAH) to FFH: -01 +22 (16H) only during video. 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 DATA04: TINT Gain E0H: -32 * TINT Gain is from -22 (EAH) to FFH: -01 +22 (16H) only during video. 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 DATA05: SHARPNESS Gain F0H: -16 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 10H: +16 DATA06: CONTRAST Gain CCH: -52 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 14H: +20 DATA07: BRIGHT Gain E0H: -32 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 DATA08: RED Gain(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA09: GREEN Gain(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA0A: BLUE Gain(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA0B: COLOR TEMP 00H: 1 01H: 2 02H: 3 03H: PRO 46 22. Audio Select Set Function The external control equipment sets combinations of audio and video inputs for the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 70H 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: AUDIO INPUT 01H: AUDIO 1 02H: AUDIO 2 03H: AUDIO 3 DATA01: VISUAL INPUT 01H: Video 1 02H: Video 2 03H: Video 3 05H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV1) 06H: HD2 (DTV2) 07H: RGB 1/ PC 1 08H: RGB 2/ PC 2 0CH: RGB 3/ PC 3 ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the input is switched. 3FH 60H 80H 70H 00H CKS * The plasma monitor returns “Not Available” when selecting the video input same as the one set at one of the AUDIO 01 to 3. Example: The plasma monitor returns “Not Available” when selecting the VIDEO1 for AUDIO2 or VIDEO3 after VIDEO1 has been set to AUDIO1. 23. Audio Select Request Function The external control equipment inquires the current combinations of audio and video inputs for the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 6FH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK: 7FH 60H 80H 6FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: AUDIO 1 01H - 0CH: VISUAL INPUT DATA DATA01: AUDIO 2 01H - 0CH: VISUAL INPUT DATA DATA02: AUDIO 3 01H - 0CH: VISUAL INPUT DATA VISUAL INPUT DATA 01H: Video 1 02H: Video 2 03H: Video 3 05H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV 1) 06H: HD2 (DTV2) 07H: RGB 1 /PC 1 08H: RGB 2 /PC 2 0CH: RGB 3 /PC 3 24. LONG LIFE Set Function The external control equipment sets the PLE, ORBITER, and INVERSE (inverse of image brightness) of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 6BH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00 : PLE 01H: AUTO 02H: LOCK DATA01 : INVERSE 01H: ON 02H: OFF 03H: WHITE DATA02 : ORBITER (PICTURE SHIFT) 01H: ON 02H: OFF ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when setting the PLE, ORBITER, and INVERSE (inverse of image brightness): 3FH 60H 80H 6BH 00H CKS 25. Failure Mode Request Function The external control equipment inquires the detection of failures of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK: 7FH 60H 80H 3FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: FAILURE MODE 1 Bit 0 : PDP MODULE 0: Abnormal 1: Normal Bit 1 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 2 : TEMPERATURE 0: Abnormal 1: Normal Bit 3 : FAN 0: Abnormal 1: Normal Bit 4 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 5 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 6 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 7 : 1: fixed (backup) DATA01:FILURE MODE 2 Bit 0–7 : 1: fixed (backup) 47 Screen mode Table of Signals Supported Supported resolution • When the screen mode is NORMAL, each signal is converted to a 1024 dots�768 lines signal. (Except for *2, 3, 4) • When the screen mode is TRUE, the picture is displayed in the original resolution. • When the screen mode is FULL, each signal is converted to a 1364 dots�768 lines signal. (Except for *3) Computer input signals supported by this system Dots � lines 640�400 640�480 848�480 852�480*1 800�600 1024�768 1152�864 1280�768 1360�765 1360�768 1376�768 1280�1024 1600�1200 640�480 832�624 1024�768 1152�870 1280�1024 1280�1024 1152�900 1280�1024 1024�768 1280�1024 768�576 640�480 Vertical frequency (Hz) 70.1 59.9 72.8 75.0 85.0 100.4 120.4 60.0 60.0 56.3 60.3 72.2 75.0 85.1 99.8 120.0 60.0 70.1 75.0 85.0 100.6 75.0 56.2 60.0 60.0 59.9 60.0 75.0 85.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 66.7 74.6 74.9 75.1 60.0 71.2 72.0 66.0 76.0 76.1 60.0 60.0 50.0 59.9 Horizontal frequency (kHz) 31.5 31.5 37.9 37.5 43.3 51.1 61.3 31.0 31.7 35.2 37.9 48.1 46.9 53.7 63.0 75.7 48.4 56.5 60.0 68.7 80.5 67.5 45.1 47.7 47.7 48.3 64.0 80.0 91.1 75.0 81.3 87.5 93.8 35.0 49.7 60.2 68.7 64.6 75.1 78.1 61.8 71.7 81.1 49.7 63.9 31.4 31.5 NORMAL (4:3) YES*2 YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*3 YES*3 YES*3 YES*3 YES*3 YES – – – – – – – – YES*4 YES*4 YES*4 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*3 YES YES*4 YES*4 YES*4 YES YES YES*4 YES*3 YES*4 YES*7 YES*7 TRUE YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – FULL (16:9) YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*3 YES*3 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*7 YES*7 RGB select*5 – – STILL – – STILL – – – – – – WIDE2 WIDE1 STILL STILL – – – – – – – – – – STILL – – STILL – – – – STILL WIDE1 WIDE1 WIDE1 WIDE2 STILL – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – MOTION *Apple Macintosh*6 Horizontal NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS NEG NEG POS POS NEG POS POS POS POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G NEG NEG – – C Sync C Sync C Sync – – – – NEG NEG Work Station (EWS4800) Work Station (HP) Work Station (SUN) Work Station (SGI) IDC-3000G Signal Type *IBM PC/AT compatible computers Vertical NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS NEG NEG POS POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G NEG NEG – – C Sync C Sync C Sync – – – – NEG NEG Sync Polarity Presence Horizontal YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – – – – – YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – YES YES Vertical YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – – – – – YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – YES YES PAL625P NTSC525P Model DVI NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO YES NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO 48 *1 Only when using a graphic accelerator board that is capable of displaying 852�480. *2 This signal is converted to a 1228 dots � 768 lines signal. *3 The picture is displayed in the original resolution. *4 The aspect ratio is 5:4. This signal is converted to a 960 dot�768 line signal. *5 Normally the RGB select mode suite for the input signals is set automatically. If the picture is not displayed properly, set the RGB mode prepared for the input signals listed in the table above. *6 To connect the monitor to Macintosh computer, use the supplied monitor adapter (D-Sub 15-pin) to your computer's video port. If your computer has a mini D-Sub 15-pin connector, you may have to use the supplied RGB cable. *7 Other screen modes (ZOOM and STADIUM) are available as well. NOTE: • While the input signals comply with the resolution listed in the table above, you may have to adjust the position and size of the picture or the fine picture because of errors in synchronization of your computer. • When a 1280 dot � 1024 line signal or 1600 dot � 1200 line signal is input to the monitor, the picture will be compressed. • This monitor has a resolution of 1365 dot � 768 line. It is recommended that the input signal should be XGA, wide XGA, or equivalent. • With digital input some signals are not accepted. • The sync may be disturbed when a nonstandard signal other than the aforementioned is input. • If you are connecting a composite sync signal, use the HD terminal. * “IBM PC/AT” and “VGA” are registered trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States. * “Apple Macintosh” is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. of the United States. 49 Symptom Picture is disturbed. Sound is noisy. Remote control operates erroneously. The remote control does not work. Monitor’s power does not turn on when the remote control’s power button is pressed. Monitor does not operate when the remote control’s buttons are pressed. No sound or picture is produced. Picture appears but no sound is produced. Poor picture with VIDEO signal input. Poor picture with RGB signal input. Tint is poor or colors are weak. Nothing appears on screen. Part of picture is cut off or picture is not centered. Image is too large or too small. Picture is unstable. POWER/STANDBY indicator is lighted in orange or red. POWER/STANDBY indicator is blinking in red. POWER/STANDBY indicator is blinking in green. Checks • Is a connected component set directly in front or at the side of the display? • Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • Is the monitor’s power cord plugged into a power outlet? • Are all the monitor’s indicators off? • Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • Is the remote control pointed at the monitor, or is there an obstacle between the remote control and the monitor? • Is direct sunlight or strong artificial light shining on the monitor’s remote control sensor? • Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • The remote cable is plugged into the REMOTE IN terminal (Wired). • The front panel buttons of the main unit do not function. • Is the monitor’s power cord plugged into a power outlet? • Is the volume set at the minimum? • Is the mute mode set? • Are the speakers properly connected? • Is AUDIO INPUT set correctly? • Improper control setting. Local interference. Cable interconnections. Input impedance is not correct level. • Improper control setting. Incorrect 15 PIN connector pin connections. • Are the tint and colors properly adjusted? • Is the computer’s power turned on? • Is a source connected? • Is the power management function in the standby or off mode? • Is the position adjustment appropriate? • Is the screen size adjustment appropriate? • Is the computer’s resolution setting appropriate? • Horizontal and / or vertical sync signal is not present when the Intelligent Power Manager control is on. • The temperature inside the main unit has become too high and has activated the protector. —————— Remedy • Leave some space between the display and the connected components. • Replace both batteries with new ones. • Plug the monitor’s power cord into a power outlet. • Press the power button on the monitor to turn on the power. • Replace both batteries with new ones. • Point the remote control at the monitor’s remote control sensor when pressing buttons, or remove the obstacle. • Eliminate the light by closing curtains, pointing the light in a different direction, etc. • Replace both batteries with new ones. • Unplung the remote cable from the monitor. • The front panel buttons do not function during Control Lock. • Plug the monitor’s power cord into a power outlet. • Increase the volume. • Press the remote control’s MUTE button. • Connect the speakers properly. • Set AUDIO INPUT on the OPTION menu correctly. • Adjust picture control as needed. Try another location for the monitor. Be sure all connections are secure. • Adjust picture controls as needed. Check pin assignments and connections. • Adjust the tint and color (under “PICTURE”). • Turn on the computer’s power. • Connect source to the monitor. • Operate the computer (move the mouse, etc.). • Adjust the “SCREEN” properly. • Press the “WIDE” button on the remote control and adjust properly. • Set to the proper resolution. • Check the input signal. • Promptly switch off the power of the main unit and wait until the internal temperature drops. See*1. • Prompty switch off the power of the main unit. See *2. *1 Overheat protector If the monitor becomes too hot, the overheat protector will be activated and the monitor will be turned off. If this happens., turn off the power to the monitor and unplug the power cord. If the room where the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move the monitor to a cooler location and wait for the monitor to cool for 60 minutes. If the problem persists, contact your NEC dealer for service. *2 In the following case, power off the monitor immediately and contact your dealer or authorized NEC Service Center. The monitor turns off 5 seconds after powering on and then the POWER/STANDBY indicator blinks. It indicates that the power supply circuit or, one or more fans have been damaged. If the picture quality is poor or there is some other problem, check the adjustments, operations, etc., before requesting service. Troubleshooting 50 Specifications Product Name PlasmaSync™ 61MP1 Plasma Monitor Product Code PX- 61XM1A Screen Size 53.2"(H)�29.9"(V) inches 1351(H)�760(V) mm diagonal 61" Aspect Ratio 16 : 9 Resolution 1365(H)�768(V) pixels Pixel Pitch 0.039"(H)�0.039"(V) inches 0.987(H)�0.987(V) mm Color Reproduction 256 levels, 16,770,000 colors Signals Synchronization Range Horizontal : 15.5 to 93.8 kHz (automatic : step scan) Vertical : 50.0 to 120 Hz (automatic : step scan) Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), PAL60, SECAM, HD*1 , DVD*1 , DTV*1 Input Terminals RGB Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin�1 Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)�1*3 Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-I 29-pin�1*2 (Not compatible with analog input) Video Visual 1 RCA-pin�1 Visual 2 BNC�1 Visual 3 S2-Video: DIN 4-pin�1 DVD/HD/DTV Visual RCA-pin (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])*1 Audio Stereo RCA�3(selectable) External Control D-sub 9-pin�1(RS-232C) Sound output 7W+7W at 6 ohm Power Supply AC120V 50/60Hz Current Rating 6.9A (maximum) Power Consumption 660W (typical) Dimensions 58.3 (W)�35.0 (H)�4.7 (D) inches 1480 (W)�890 (H)�119(D) mm Weight 134.5 lbs / 61.0 kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature 0°C to 35°C / 32°F to 95°F Humidity 20 to 80% Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F Humidity 10 to 90% Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select, Volume up/down, OSM control Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP, DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Pointer, Zoom up/ down, Off timer, Wireless/ Wired remote control OSM Functions Picture (Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness/ Color / Tint / Picture mode / Color temperature/ Noise reductions), Sound (Bass / Treble/ Balance),Screen (V-Position / H- Position/ V-Height / H-Width /Auto Picture / Fine picture/ Picture adjustment), Function (OSM/ OSM adjustment/ Power management/ Gray level/ Cinema mode/ RGB3 Adjustment, Long Life (PLE, Orbiter, Inverse, White)/ Reset)/Option (Audio input/ BNC select/ RGBselect/ HD select/ Picture Size), Information (Frequency / Language / Color system) The features and specifications may be subject to change without notice. *1HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this system 480P (60 Hz) 480I (60 Hz) 525P (60 Hz) 525I (60 Hz) 625P (50 Hz) 625I (50 Hz) 720P (60 Hz) 1035I (60 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz) *2 It doesn’t cope with copy protection. *3 A change of DVD2/HD2 can be performed with RGB2. Other Features 3D motion adaptive Scan Converter (with 2-3 pull down Converter), Digital Zoom function (100-300% Selectable) (Tentative), Self Diagnosis, Anti Image Burn, Color Temperature Select, Control Lock, Power management, Plug and play (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only), Multi screen operation Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Remote cable, RGB cable (Mini D-Sub 15-pin to Mini D-Sub 15-pin connector), Power cord, User’s Manual, Safety metal fittings, Ferrite cores, Bands Regulations UL Approved (UL 1950/ CSA 950) DOC Canada requirements Meets FCC class A requirements Units are in inch (mm) 4.7" (119) 1.8" (45) 2.9" (74) 58.3" (1480) 35.0" (890) 53.9" (1380) 30.7" (790) Copyright © by NEC Corporation 53 Printed on recycled paper Printed in Japan 7S800261 NEC Technologies Technologies T , Inc. 1250 N. Arlington Heights Road, Suite 500 Itasca, Illinois 60143-1248 PlasmaSync Plasma Monitor User's Manual Bedienungshandbuch Manuel de l'utilisateur Manual del Usuario Manuale d'uso Bruksanvisning User’s Manual Bedienungshandbuch Manuel de l’utilisateur Manual del Usuario Manuale d’uso Bruksanvisning Precautions Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC plasma monitor and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION:TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit. This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been included. Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems. WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ALSO DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLETS, UNLESS THE PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED. REFRAIN FROM OPENING THE CABINET AS THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. WARNING This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Important Information Warnings and Safety Precaution The NEC plasma monitor is designed and manufactured to provide long, trouble-free service. No maintenance other than cleaning is required. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the panel. Never use solvents such as alcohol or thinner to clean the panel surface. The plasma display panel consists of fine picture elements (cells). Although NEC produces the plasma display panels with more than 99.99 percent active cells, there may be some cells that do not produce light or remain lit. For operating safety and to avoid damage to the unit, read carefully and observe the following instructions. To avoid shock and fire hazards: 1. Provide adequate space for ventilation to avoid internal heat build-up. Do not cover rear vents or install the unit in a closed cabinet or shelves. The unit is equipped with cooling fans. If you install the unit in an enclosure, make sure there is adequate space at the top of the unit to allow hot air to rise and escape. If the monitor becomes too hot, the overheat protector will be activated and the monitor will be turned off. If this happens, turn off the power to the monitor and unplug the power cord. If the room where the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move the monitor to a cooler location, and wait for the monitor to cool for 60 minutes. If the problem persists, contact your NEC dealer for service. 2. Do not use the power cord polarized plug with extension cords or outlets unless the prongs can be completely inserted. 3. Do not expose the unit to water or moisture. 4. Avoid damage to the power cord, and do not attempt to modify the power cord. 5. Unplug the unit during electrical storms or if the unit will not be used over a long period. 6. Do not open the cabinet which has potentially dangerous high voltage components inside. If the unit is damaged in this way the warranty will be void. Moreover, there is a serious risk of electric shock. 7. Do not attempt to service or repair the unit. NEC is not liable for any bodily harm or damage caused if unqualified persons attempt service or open the back cover. Refer all service to authorized NEC Service Centers. NOTE: When you connect a computer to this monitor, attach the supplied ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not comform to mandatory CE or C-Tick standards. Attaching the ferrite cores: Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied). Close the lid tightly until the clamps click. Use the band to fasten the ferrite core (supplied) to the DVI cable. DVI cable (not supplied) core (small) core (small) Connector band band Power cable (supplied) core (large) core (large) To avoid damage and prolong operating life: 1. Use only with 100-240V 50/60Hz AC power supply. Continued operation at line voltages greater than 100- 240 Volts AC will shorten the life of the unit, and might even cause a fire hazard. 2. Handle the unit carefully when installing it and do not drop. 3. Set the unit away from heat, excessive dust, and direct sunlight. 4. Protect the inside of the unit from liquids and small metal objects. In case of accident, unplug the unit and have it serviced by an authorized NEC Service Center. 5. Do not hit or scratch the panel surface as this causes flaws on the surface of the screen. 6. For correct installation and mounting it is strongly recommended to use a trained,authorized NEC dealer. 7. As is the case with any phosphor-based display (like a CRT monitor, for example) light output will gradually decrease over the life of a Plasma Display Panel. Recommendations to avoid or minimize phosphor burn-in Like all phosphor-based display devices and all other gas plasma displays, plasma monitors can be susceptible to phosphor burn under certain circumstances. Certain operating conditions, such as the continuous display of a static image over a prolonged period of time, can result in phosphor burn if proper precautions are not taken. To protect your investment in this NEC plasma monitor, please adhere to the following guidelines and recommendations for minimizing the occurrence of image burn: * Always enable and use your computer’s screen saver function during use with a computer input source. * Display a moving image whenever possible. * Change the position of the menu display from time to time. * Always power down the monitor when you are finished using it. If the plasma monitor is in long term use or continuous operation take the following measures to reduce the likelihood of phosphor burn: * Lower the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as possible without impairing image readability. * Display an image with many colors and color gradations (i.e. photographic or photo-realistic images). * Create image content with minimal contrast between light and dark areas, for example white characters on black backgrounds. Use complementary or pastel color whenever possible. * Avoid displaying images with few colors and distinct, sharply defined borders between colors. Contact an NEC affiliate or authorized dealer for other recommended procedures that will best suit your particular application needs. How to Attach Options to the Plasma Monitor .. E-1 Introduction ...................................................E-2 Introduction to the PlasmaSync 61MP1 Plasma Monitor..................................................... E-2 The features you’ll enjoy include:............................. E-2 Contents of the Package ......................................... E-2 Options ............................................................... E-2 Part Names and Function ................................ E-3 Front View ........................................................... E-3 Rear View / Terminal Board ................................... E-4 Remote Control ..................................................... E-5 Battery Installation and Replacement ....................... E-6 Using the wired remote control mode ...................... E-7 Operating Range .................................................. E-7 Handling the remote control ................................... E-7 Installation ....................................................E-8 Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer ............ E-9 Connections with Equipment that has a Digital Interface .............................................. E-9 Connecting Your Document Camera ........................ E-9 Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player................ E-9 Connecting Your DVD Player .................................. E-9 External Speaker Connections ...............................E-10 Pin Assignments and Signal Levels for 15 pin RGB (Analog) .......................................E-11 Pin Configuration and Signal of the RGB 3 IN Connector (DVI Connector) ............E-11 Basic Operations........................................... E-12 POWER ..............................................................E-12 To turn the unit ON and OFF: ................................ E-12 VOLUME ............................................................E-12 To adjust the volume: ............................................. E-12 MUTE .................................................................E-12 To cancel the sound:............................................... E-12 DISPLAY ..............................................................E-12 To check the settings: ............................................. E-12 DIGITAL ZOOM ...................................................E-12 AUTO ADJUST ....................................................E-12 To adjust the size or quality of the picture automatically: ........................................................ E-12 OFF TIMER ..........................................................E-13 To set the off timer: ................................................ E-13 To check the remaining time: ................................. E-13 To cancel the off timer ........................................... E-13 WIDE Operations........................................... E-14 Watching with a wide screen (manual) ...................E-14 When watching videos or digital video discs.......... E-14 When watching high definition video source ......... E-14 Watching computer images with a wide screen .......E-15 When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” ............... E-15 MULTI SCREEN Operations .............................. E-16 Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the same time .................................................E-16 Selecting the input signals to be displayed ............. E-16 Adjusting the OSM controls.................................. E-16 OSM Controls ................................................ E-17 Menu Operations .................................................E-17 Picture Settings Menu............................................E-19 Adjusting the picture .............................................. E-19 Setting the picture mode according to the brightness of the room ........................................... E-20 Setting the color temperature ................................. E-21 Adjusting the color to the desired quality ............... E-22 Reducing noise in the picture ................................. E-23 Sound Settings Menu ............................................E-24 Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance ..... E-24 Screen Settings Menu ...........................................E-25 Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj ............................................................. E-25 Function Settings Menu .........................................E-26 Setting the on-screen menu .................................... E-26 Adjusting the position of the menu display ............ E-27 Setting the power management for computer images .............................................. E-28 POWER/STANDBY indicator ............................... E-29 Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ..... E-30 Setting the picture to suit the movie ....................... E-30 Setting RGB3 ADJ................................................. E-31 Reducing burn-in of the screen .............................. E-31 Resetting to the default values ................................ E-32 Option Settings Menu ...........................................E-33 Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ........ E-33 Setting the BNC connectors ................................... E-33 Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select screen ......................................................... E-34 Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size............................................................ E-35 Setting the picture size for RGB input signals ........ E-36 Information Menu ................................................E-36 Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals, and resolution ........................................................ E-36 Setting the language for the menus......................... E-37 Setting the video signal format ............................... E-37 External Control ........................................... E-39 Table of Signals Supported ............................ E-47 Supported resolution ............................................E-47 Troubleshooting............................................ E-49 Specifications ............................................... E-50 Contents E-1 You can attach your optional mounts or stand to the plasma monitor in the following way: * Unpack the plasma monitor. (See Drawing A.) * Take it out, put your hand in the handy-grip recess at the rear, and move it to an appropriate place. Then attach the optional mounts or stand. (See Drawing B.) • This device cannot be installed on its own. Be sure to use a stand or original mounting unit. (Wall mount unit, Stand, etc.) * See page E-2. • For correct installation and mounting it is strongly recommended to use a trained, authorized NEC dealer. Failure to follow correct mounting procedures could result in damage to the equipment or injury to the installer. Product warranty does not cover damage caused by improper installation. Ventilation Requirements for enclosure mounting To allow heat to disperse, leave space between surrounding objects as shown on the diagram below when installing. How to Attach Options to the Plasma Monitor Drawing A Drawing B 50mm (2") 1580mm (62.2") 990mm (39.0") 50mm (2") 50mm (2") 50mm (2") Wall Wall 50mm (2") E-2 Introduction to the PlasmaSync 61MP1 Plasma Monitor NEC’s PlasmaSync is a seamless blend of cutting-edge visual technology and sophisticated design. At 61-inches, with a 16:9 aspect ratio, the PlasmaSync 61MP1 certainly makes a big impression. However, at a mere 4.7 inches/ 119 mm thin, the monitor’s sleek techno-art lines blend in well with your environment. PlasmaSync’s crisp, vivid image quality will transform data from any graphic medium from PCs to DVD players- into art. And weighing only 134.5 lbs/ 61 kg, it actually can be hung almost anywhere. NEC has made sure that a host of multimedia resources can be easily connected and displayed as brilliantly as intended on the PlasmaSync monitor. The features you’ll enjoy include: • 61-inch screen • 16:9 aspect ratio • Capsulated Color Filter (CCF) and black matrix • The enhanced display in red uses a two-stage filtering system where Accucrimson is combined with our special CCF. • 4.7 inch / 119 mm thin • 134.5 lbs/ 61 kg light • High-resolution screen: 1365�768 pixels • 160-degrees of off-axis viewing, horizontally and vertically. • Flicker - and warp - free display provides excellent image geometry even in screen corners • Not affected by magnetic fields, no color drift or edge distortion. • VGA, SVGA, XGA, SXGA, computer signal compatibility • NTSC, PAL, SECAM, composite and S-Video signal compatibility • 480P, 1080I, 720P and HDTV signal compatibility • PCs, VCRs, Laser Disc and DVD player source compatibility • AccuBlend scan conversion automatically converts VGA, SVGA and SXGA signals to the panel’s native resolution • Advanced Mass Area Sampling Progressive Scan method is employed. • RGB input (3*), Video input (3), DVD/HD input (2*), Audio input (3), External Control input (1) • AccuColor control system provides user selectable on- screen color temperature settings • New Drive Technology • Component video input terminal for DVD, 15.75kHz (Y, CB, CR ) • Digital broadcasting source compatibitly • NEC’s OSM menu-driven on screen control system that makes image adjustments a snap • Seven languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, and Japanese) • A handy-grip recess is provided to facilitate installation and movement. * You can select RGB source or Component source for the 5BNC terminal. When selecting an RGB input, the source is switched to the RGB input (3); when selecting a component input, the source is switched to the DVD/ HD input (2). Contents of the Package � PlasmaSync 61MP1 plasma monitor � Power cord � RGB cable (Mini D-Sub 15-pin to Mini D-Sub 15- pin connector) � Remote control with two AAA Batteries � User’s manual � Remote cable � Safety metal fittings* � Ferrite core (small�2, large�2), band * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent tipping due to external shock when using the stand (option). Screw the safety fittings to the holes in the back of the monitor. Options • Wall mount unit • Ceiling mount unit • Tilt mount unit • Tabletop stand • Speakers • Others Introduction E-3 Front View t Power Turns the monitor’s power on and off. y POWER/STANDBY indicator When the power is on ............................. Lights green. When the power is in the standby mode ... Lights red. u Remote sensor window Receives the signals from the remote control. Part Names and Function q PROCEED Sets the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode and displays the main menu. w VOLUME DOWN and UP Adjusts the volume. Functions as the CURSOR (L/ M) buttons in the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode. e LEFT/– and RIGHT/+ Enlarges or reduces the image. Functions as the CURSOR (� / �) buttons in the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode. r INPUT SELECT / EXIT Switches the input, in the following order: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2 → VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1← Functions as the EXIT buttons in the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode. POWER/STANDBY PROCEED INPUT SELECT DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ /EXIT VOLUME POWER/STANDBY PROCEED INPUT SELECT DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ /EXIT VOLUME E-4 Rear View/ Terminal Board A AC IN Connect the included power cord here. B EXT SPEAKER L and R Connect speakers here. Maintain the correct polarity. C EXTERNAL CONTROL This terminal is used when power ON/OFF, input selection and AUDIO MUTE and other controls are operated externally (by external control). See also page E-39 for external control. D REMOTE CONTROL Connect the supplied remote cable here. E CONTROL LOCK When “CONTROL LOCK” is set “ON”, the buttons on the set’s control panel do not function. F VIDEO1, 2, 3 Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Laser Discs, etc. here. G AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3 These are audio input terminals. The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot them to on the menu screen. H DVD1 / HD1 Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. here. I RGB1 Inputs the analog RGB signal of personal computer, etc. J RGB2/ DVD2/ HD2 RGB2: Inputs the analog RGB signal. DVD2/ HD2: Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. here. K RGB3 (DVI 29pin) Inputs a digital RGB signal (TMDS). L Handy-Grip recess Use the recesses (as shown) when you need to carry the display. EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON / OFF SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT AC IN RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT A L B C D E EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON/ OFF AC IN F G H I K J E-5 Remote Control q POWER ON/OFF Switches Power ON/OFF. (This does not operate when POWER/STANDBY indicator of the main unit is off.) w RGB/PC Press this button to select RGB/PC as the source. → RGB/PC1 → RGB/PC2 → RGB/PC3 RGB/PC can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button on the monitor. The input switches as follows each time the button is pressed: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2→ VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1 ← e DVD / HD Press this button to select DVD/HD as the source. DVD/HD can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button on the monitor. The input switches as follows each time the button is pressed: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2→ VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1 ← r VIDEO Press this button to select VIDEO as the source. → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2 → VIDEO3 VIDEO can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button on the monitor. The input switches as follows each time the button is pressed: → VIDEO1 → VIDEO2→ VIDEO3→ DVD/HD RGB/PC3 ← RGB/PC2 ← RGB/PC1 ← t PROCEED Press this button to access the OSM controls. Press this button during the display of the main menu to go to the sub menu. y CURSOR (L / M / � / �) Use these buttons to select items or settings and to adjust settings or switch the display patterns. u EXIT Press this button to exit the OSM controls in the main menu. Press this button during the display of the sub menu to return to the main menu. i POINTER Press this button to display the pointer. o ZOOM (+ /–) Enlarges or reduces the image. !0 VOLUME (+ /–) Adjusts the volume. !1 MUTE Mutes the sound. !2 WIDE The type of broadcast is detected automatically, and the recommended wide screen is set. E-6 !3 DISPLAY Displays the source settings on the screen. !4 OFF TIMER Activates the off timer for the unit. !5 MULTI Press this button to select a screen mode from among single mode, side by side, and picture in picture. !6 SELECT Press this button to select the active picture in a multi screen mode. !7 AUTO ADJUST Press this button to adjust Fine Picture, Picture ADJ, Position, and Contrast automatically, or to switch the screen size to ZOOM mode automatically with the superimposed caption displayed fully only when the picture contains dark areas above and below the picture. !8 Remote control signal transmitter Transmits the remote control signals. !9 Remote Jack Insert the plug of the supplied remote cable here when using the supplied remote control in the wired condition. Battery Installation and Replacement Insert the 2 “AAA” batteries, making sure to set them in with the proper polarity. 1.Press and open the cover. 2.Align the batteries according to the (+) and (–) indication inside the case. 3.Replace the cover. E-7 Using the wired remote control mode Connect the supplied remote cable to the remote control’s remote jack and the “REMOTE CONTROL” terminal on the monitor. When the cable is connected, the mode automatically switches to wired remote control. When the wired remote control mode is used, the remote control can be operated even if no batteries are loaded. Operating Range * Use the remote control within a distance of about 7 m/ 23ft. from the front of the monitor’s remote control sensor and at horizontal and vertical angles of up to approximately 30°. * The remote control operation may not function if the monitor’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light, or if there is an obstacle between the sensor and the remote control. Handling the remote control • Do not drop or mishandle the remote control. • Do not get the remote control wet. If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately. • Avoid heat and humidity. • When not using the remote control for a long period, remove the batteries. • Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types together. • Do not take apart the batteries, heat them, or throw them into a fire. • When using the remote control in the wireless condition, be sure to unplug the remote cable from the REMOTE CONTROL terminal on the monitor. EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON / OFF SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT AC IN RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON/ OFF Remote Control Cable To Remote Jack POWER/STANDBY PROCEED INPUT SELECT DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ /EXIT VOLUME 30˚ 30˚ Approx. 7m/ 23ft E-8 Installation Note: This PlasmaSync monitor has the sapasity to display images when connected to European DVD players with a SCART output signal, which is RGB with composite sync. NEC can supply a special SCART cable, which will enable you to use the RGB with composite sync signal. To obtain the special cable as well as for further information, please contact NEC help desk 0181 752 3535. Please refer to page E-33 for selection of the correct mode in the on-screen manager. RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 VCR or Laser Disc Player Document Camera DVD Player IBM VGA or Compatibles Personal computer with a digital RGB output Signal cable (supplied) To Mini D-Sub 15 pin connector on the plasma monitor To video inputs on the plasma monitor Monitor adapter for Macintosh Macintosh or Compatibles (Desk top type) • For Y/CB/Cr, connect to the DVD1 or DVD2 terminals. • For RGB + composite sync., connect to the DVD2 terminals. For composite sync., connect to the HD terminals. E-9 Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer Connecting your PC or Macintosh computer to your plasma monitor will enable you to display your computer’s screen image for an impressive presentation. The plasma monitor supports the signals described on page E-47. To connect a PC, Macintosh or compatible graphics adapter, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and computer. 2. If your PC does not support XGA/SVGA/VGA you will need to install an XGA/SVGA/VGA graphics board. Consult your computer’s owner’s manual for your XGA/ SVGA/VGA configuration. If you need to install a new board, see the manual that comes with your new graphics board for installation instructions. 3. The plasma monitor provides signal compatibility up to VESA 1600�1200 (UXGA). However, it is not recommended to use this resolution due to image readability on the monitors 1365�768 native pixel resolution panel. 4. Use the signal cable that’s supplied to connect your PC or Macintosh computer to the plasma monitor. For Macintosh, use the monitor adapter to connect to your computer’s video port. 5. Turn on the plasma monitor and the computer. 6. If the plasma monitor goes blank after a period of inactivity, it may be caused by a screen saver installed on the computer you’ve connected to the plasma monitor. When using a Macintosh with the plasma monitor, the following four display standards are supported using the Macintosh adapter : 13" fixed mode 16" fixed mode 19" fixed mode 21" fixed mode The 19" fixed mode is recommended for the plasma monitor. Connections with Equipment that has a Digital Interface Connections can be made with equipment that is equipped with a digital interface compliant with the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standard. * Use a DVI 29-pin signal cable and the ferrite cores (supplied) when making connections to the RGB3 IN (DVI) connector of the main unit. Note that the RGB3 IN(DVI) terminal does not support analog RGB input source. Note: 1. Input TMDS signals conforming to DVI standards. The TMDS input corresponds to 1 link. 2. To maintain display quality, use a cable with a quality prescribed by DVI standards that is within 5 meters in length. Connecting Your Document Camera You can connect your plasma monitor to a document camera. To do so, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and document camera. 2. Use a standard video cable to connect your document camera to the Video input on your plasma monitor. 3. Turn on the plasma monitor and the document camera. Note: Refer to your document camera owner’s manual for more information about your camera’s video output requirements. Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player Use common RCA cables (not provided) to connect your VCR or laser disc player to your plasma monitor. To make these connections, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and VCR or laser disc player. 2. Connect one end of your RCA cable to the video output connector on the back of your VCR or laser disc player, connect the other end to the Video input on your plasma monitor. Use standard RCA audio patch cords to connect the audio from your VCR or laser disc player to your plasma monitor (if your VCR or laser disc player has this capability). Be careful to keep your right and left channel connections correct for stereo sound. 3. Turn on the plasma monitor and the VCR or laser disc player. Note: Refer to your VCR or laser disc player owner’s manual for more information about your equipment’s video output requirements. Connecting Your DVD Player You can connect your plasma monitor to a DVD player. To do so, simply: 1. Turn off the power to your plasma monitor and DVD player. 2. Use a standard video cable to connect your DVD player to the Y, Cb, and Cr inputs on your plasma monitor. Or use the DVD-player’s S-Video output. Use a standard S-Video cable to connect to the S-Video input on the plasma monitor. 3. Turn on the plasma monitor and the DVD player. E-10 External Speaker Connections External speakers may be connected to the plasma monitor to reproduce sound from VIDEO, DVD or RGB signal sources. External speakers may be connected directly to the SPEAKERS terminals or indirectly by connecting a stereo system amplifier to the audio outputs. CAUTION: Unplug the plasma monitor and all connected components before connecting external speakers. Use only speakers with 6-ohm impedance and a power input rating of 7 watts or more. RGB 3 (Digital RGB) RGB 1 R/CR/PR L(MONO) VIDEO 1 G / Y HD VD R VIDEO 2 VIDEO 3 Y CB/PB L(MONO) R L(MONO) R CR/PR B/CB/PB AUDIO 2 DVD1/HD1 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 RGB2/DVD2/HD2 EXTERNAL CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL LOCK ON / OFF SPEAKERS MUST HAVE MORE THAN 7WATT RATING IMPEDANCE 6 OHM RIGHT LEFT AC IN LEFT RIGHT To connect external speakers directly to the plasma monitor: 1. Strip the ends of the speaker wires. 2. Press down the tabs below the SPEAKERS terminals, insert the speaker wire and release the tab to secure the speaker wire connection: [a] Connect the right speaker (located at right side of the monitor when viewed from the front) positive (+) wire to RIGHT +. [b] Connect the right speaker negative (–) wire to RIGHT –. [c] Connect the left speaker negative (–) wire to LEFT–. [d] Connect the left speaker positive (+) wire to LEFT+. E-11 Pin Assignments and Signal Levels for 15 pin RGB (Analog) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 RGB 3 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 25 26 27 28 16 24 29 Signal (Analog) Red Green or sync-on-green Blue No connection Ground Red ground Green ground Blue ground No connection Sync signal ground No connection Bi-directional DATA (SDA) Horizontal sync or Composite sync Vertical sync Data clock Pin Configuration and Signal of the RGB 3 IN Connector (DVI Connector) The unit is equipped with a type of connector commonly used for both analog and digital. (Functionally, this cannot be used for an analog input.) (TMDS can be used for one link only.) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Signal (Digital) T.M.D.S Data 2 - T.M.D.S Data 2 + T.M.D.S Data 2 Shield No connection No connection DDC Clock DDC Data No connection T.M.D.S Data 1 - T.M.D.S Data 1 + T.M.D.S Data 1 Shield No connection No connection +5V Power Ground Hot Plug Detect T.M.D.S Data 0 - T.M.D.S Data 0 + T.M.D.S Data 0 Shield No connection No connection T.M.D.S Clock Shield T.M.D.S Clock + T.M.D.S Clock - No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection E-12 POWER To turn the unit ON and OFF: 1. Plug the power cord into an active AC power outlet. 2. Press the POWER ON button (on the remote control) to turn on the unit. The monitor’s POWER/STANDBY indicator will light up (green) when the unit is on. 3. Press the POWER OFF button (on the remote control or the unit) to turn off the unit. The monitor’s POWER/STANDBY indicator turns red and the standby mode is set (only when turning off the unit with the remote control). VOLUME To adjust the volume: 1. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote control or the unit) to increase to the desired level. 2. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote control or the unit) to decrease to the desired level. MUTE To cancel the sound: Press the MUTE button on the remote control to cancel the sound; press again to restore. DISPLAY To check the settings: 1. The screen changes each time the DISPLAY button is pressed. 2. If the button is not pressed for approximately three seconds, the menu turns off. DIGITAL ZOOM Digital zoom specifies the picture position and enlarges the picture. 1. Press the POINTER button to display the pointer. ( ) To change the size of the picture: Press the ZOOM+ button and enlarge the picture. The pointer will change to resemble a magnifying glass. ( ) A press of the ZOOM- button will reduce the picture and return it to its original size. To change the picture position: Select the position with the LM� � buttons. 2. Press the POINTER button to delete the pointer. AUTO ADJUST To adjust the size or quality of the picture automatically: Press the AUTO ADJUST button. Information � AUTO ADJUST ON setting When RGB (still picture) input is selected ......Fine Picture, Picture ADJ, Position, and Contrast will be adjusted automatically. When RGB (motion picture), VIDEO, or Y/Pb/Pr (component) input is selected ......The screen size switches to ZOOM mode automatically with the superimposed caption displayed fully only when the picture contains dark areas above and below the picture. Basic Operations E-13 OFF TIMER To set the off timer: The off timer can be set to turn the power off after 30, 60, 90 or 120 minutes. 1. Press the OFF TIMER button to start the timer at 30 minutes. 2. Press the OFF TIMER button to the desired time. 3. The timer starts when the menu turns off. → 30 → 60 → 90 → 120 → 0 OFF TIMER30 To check the remaining time: 1. Once the off timer has been set, press the OFF TIMER button once. 2. The remaining time is displayed, then turns off after a few seconds. 3. When five minutes remain the remaining time appears until it reaches zero. OFF TIMER28 To cancel the off timer: 1. Press the OFF TIMER button twice in a row. 2. The off timer is canceled. OFF TIMER0 Note: After the power is turned off with the off timer ... A slight current is still supplied to the monitor. When you are leaving the room or do not plan to use the system for a long period of time, turn off the power of the monitor. E-14 Watching with a wide screen (manual) With this function, you can select one of four screen sizes. When watching videos or digital video discs 1. Press the WIDE button on the remote control. 2. Within 3 seconds ... Press the WIDE button again. The screen size switches as follows: → ZOOM → NORMAL → FULL → STADIUM ZOOM size screen The picture is expanded in the horizontal and vertical direction, maintaining the original proportions. * Use this for theater size (wide) movies, etc. NORMAL size screen (4:3) The normal size screen is displayed. * The picture has the same size as video pictures with a 4 : 3 aspect ratio. FULL size screen The image is expanded in the horizontal direction. * Images compressed in the horizontal direction (“squeezed images”) are expanded in the horizontal direction and displayed on the entire screen. (Normal images are expanded in the horizontal direction.) STADIUM size screen The picture is expanded in the horizontal and vertical directions at different ratios. * Use this for watching normal video programs (4:3) with a wide screen. When watching high definition video source 1. Press the WIDE button on the remote control. FULL size screen (16 : 9) The full size screen is displayed. * The picture has the same size as video pictures (16 : 9). WIDE Operations E-15 Watching computer images with a wide screen Switch to the wide screen mode to expand the 4 : 3 image to fill the entire screen. 1.Press the WIDE button on the remote control. 2.Within 3 seconds ... Press the WIDE button again. The screen size switches as follows: → NORMAL → FULL NORMAL size screen (4:3 or SXGA 5:4) The picture has the same size as the normal computer image. FULL size screen The image is expanded in the horizontal direction. When wide signals are input. FULL size screen When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” The screen size switches as follows: → TRUE → FULL TRUE size screen (VGA, SVGA 4:3) The image is true resolution. FULL size screen The image is expanded in the horizontal and vertical direction. When wide signals are input. TRUE The image is true resolution. FULL Information � Supported resolution See page E-47 for details on the display output of the various VESA signal standards supported by the monitor. � “PICTURE SIZE” setting When the setting of “PICTURE SIZE” is OFF, the size of RGB-input pictures will be TRUE in place of NORMAL. � When 852 (848) dot � 480 line wide VGA* signals with a vertical frequency of 60 Hz and horizontal frequency of 31.7 (31.0) kHz are in- put Select an appropriate setting for RGB SELECT mode referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page E-47. * “ IBM PC/AT” and “VGA” are registered trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States. E-16 Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the same time * An RGB-input picture may not be displayed in these modes, depending on the input signal specifications. 1. Press the MULTI button to select a screen mode from among single mode, side by side, and picture in picture. Side by side 1 VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 A B Press the cursor buttons � � on the remote control to switch either side by side 1 (with �) or side by side 2 (with �). Note: Picture A and B on the above screen are not always of the same height. Side by side 2 VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 Sub screen Main screen Picture in picture VIDEO1 Sub screen Main screen RGB/PC1 Press the cursor buttons � � on the remote control to switch the position of the sub screen. VIDEO1 Sub screen Main screen RGB/PC1 2. If you wish to switch the setting of the picture, press the SELECT button to make the desired picture active. Each press of the SELECT button changes the selection of the active picture. MULTI SCREEN Operations VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 A B VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 A B Selecting the input signals to be displayed 1. Press the SELECT button to make the desired picture active. 2. Press the RGB/PC, VIDEO, or DVD/HD button. Each press of the button changes the selection of the input signal. The INPUT SELECT button on the monitor can also be used to change the selection. Adjusting the OSM controls 1. Press the PROCEED button to display the MAIN MENU. 2. Adjust the setting to your preference. For details, see “OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls” on page E-17. Note: During multi mode, Auto Adjust does not affect the screen. Information � Positioning on the screen (for side by side) Depending on the input-signal selection, positioning of the picture is settled as follows. Pictures displayed on the left ........VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3, HD1/ DVD1/DTV1, or HD2/DVD2/ DTV2 Pictures displayed on the right ......RGB/PC1, RGB/PC2, RGB/PC3 � Positioning on the screen (for picture in picture) Pictures displayed Main screen .... RGB/PC1, RGB/PC2, RGB/PC3, HD 1/DVD 1/DTV 1, or HD 2/ DVD 2/DTV 2 Sub screen ...... VIDEO1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, HD1/ DVD1/DTV1, or HD2/DVD2/DTV2 � Multi screen operations may not function depending on the type of the RGB signals. E-17 Menu Operations The OSM window is displayed with respect to the screen as shown on the diagram. * Depending on the screen’s mode, the OSM may be displayed differently. In the explanation, the OSM section is shown close up. MAIN MENU PICTURE SOUND SCREEN FUNCTION OPTIONS INFORMATION SEL. OK EXIT EXIT PROCEED The following describes how to use the menus and the selected items. 1. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU. MAIN MENU PICTURE SOUND SCREEN FUNCTION OPTIONS INFORMATION SEL. OK EXIT EXIT PROCEED 2. Press the cursor buttons L M on the remote control to highlight the menu you wish to enter. 3. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to select a submenu or item. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 4. Adjust the level or change the setting of the selected item by using the cursor buttons � � on the remote control. OSM(On Screen Menu) Controls 5. The change is stored until you adjust it again. 6. Repeat steps 2 – 5 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control to return to the main menu. Note: The main menu disappears by pressing the EXIT button. E-18 Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset PICTURE CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast. Center Yes BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness. Center Yes SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness. Center Yes COLOR Adjusts the color. Center Yes TINT Adjusts the tint. Center Yes PICTURE MODE Sets the picture mode according to the VIDEO environment and MEMORY Yes image software. COLOR TEMP Adjusts the color temperature and white balance. 2*1 Yes NR Reduces noise visible in image. OFF Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset SOUND BASS Sets the bass. Center Yes TREBLE Sets the treble. Center Yes BALANCE Sets the left/right balance. Center Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset SCREEN V-POSITION Adjusts the vertical position. Center Yes H-POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position. Center Yes V-HEIGHT Adjusts the vertical size. Min Yes H-WIDTH Adjusts the horizontal size. Min Yes AUTO PICTURE Turn this on to have the monitor automatically adjust “FINE PICTURE” OFF*1 No and “PICTURE ADJ”. FINE PICTURE Adjusts for flickering on the computer image. Min*1 Yes PICTURE ADJ. Adjusts for striped patterns on the computer image. Center*1 Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset FUNCTION OSM Turns the on-screen menu (screen mode, etc.) off (when set to “OFF”). ON Yes When set to “ON”, the on-screen menu is displayed. OSM ADJ. Adjusts the vertical and horizontal positions of the menu display. 1 Yes POWER MGT Sets the monitor for use as an energy-saving display when used with a OFF Yes computer. GRAY LEVEL In case of 4 : 3, sets the luminance of both sides. 3 Yes CINEMA MODE Sets the picture to suit the movie. ON Yes RGB3 ADJ. Adjusts the picture when the picture input from the RGB3 input 1 Yes terminal is distorted. LONG LIFE Sets the picture to reduce burn-in of the display. *2 Yes RESET Resets all the settings (PICTURE, SOUND, SCREEN, FUNCTION, — — etc.) to the factory default values. Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset OPTION AUDIO INPUT Sets the allocation of the audio connectors. *3 Yes BNC SELECT Sets the BNC connectors. RGB Yes RGB SELECT Sets the appropriate mode for the computer image. AUTO Yes RGB (VGA signals), VIDEO (Moving picture), WIDE (WIDE VGA) DTV. HD SELECT Sets the digital broadcasting (1080A,1080B) or the High Vision (1035I). 1080B No PICTURE SIZE Sets the picture size for RGB input. ON Yes Main menu Sub menu Functions Default Reset INFORMATION FREQUENCY Used to check the frequency and synchronizing polarities of the signal — — currently being inputted. LANGUAGE Sets the language of the menus (Japanese, English, German, French, English No Swedish, Italian or Spanish). COLOR SYSTEM Sets the VIDEO format (AUTO1, AUTO2, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, AUTO1 No SECAM, 4.43 NTSC or 3.58 NTSC). *1 RGB/PC only. *2 PLE: AUTO ORBITER: OFF INVERSE: OFF *3 AUDIO1: VIDEO1 AUDIO2: HD/DVD1 AUDIO3: RGB1 E-19 Picture Settings Menu Adjusting the picture The contrast, brightness, sharpness, color and tint can be adjusted as desired. Example: Adjusting the contrast Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “CONTRAST”. PICTURE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to adjust the contrast. CONTRAST * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current setting is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the adjustment is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Note: If “CAN NOT ADJUST” appears ... When trying to enter the PICTURE submenu, make sure PICTURE MODE is set to MEMORY. Information � Picture adjustment screen CONTRAST .... Changes the picture’s contrast. BRIGHTNESS. Changes the picture’s brightness. SHARPNESS .. Changes the picture’s sharpness. Adjusts picture detail of VIDEO display. COLOR ...........Changes the color density. TINT ................Changes the picture’s tint. Adjust for natural colored skin, background, etc. � Adjusting the computer image Only the contrast and brightness can be adjusted when a computer signal is connected. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the “PICTURE MODE” settings. E-20 Setting the picture mode according to the brightness of the room There are four picture modes that can be used effectively according to the environment in which you are viewing the display. Example: Setting the “THEATER” mode Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE MODE”. PICTURE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. To set to “THEATER” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “THEATER”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → MEMORY ↔ THEATER ↔ NORMAL ↔ RESET ← PICTURE MODE THEATER : * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the adjustment is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Types of picture modes MEMORY ........ The last picture adjustments are stored here. THEATER ........ Set this mode when watching video in a dark room. This mode provides darker, finer pictures, like the screen in movie theaters. CONTRAST = 80% for RESET mode BRIGHTNESS = 95% for RESET mode NORMAL ......... Set this mode when watching video in a bright room. This mode provides dynamic pictures with distinct differences between light and dark sections. CONTRAST = 96% for RESET mode RESET ............ Use this to reset the picture to the factory default settings. E-21 Setting the color temperature Use this procedure to set color tone produced by the plasma display. Example: Setting “1” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “COLOR TEMP.”. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to select “1”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ↔ PRO ← * See page E-22 to set “PRO”. COLOR TEMP. 1 : * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Setting the color temperature 1 ......................High (bluer) 2......................... Middle (Standard) 3 ......................Low (redder) � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. E-22 Adjusting the color to the desired quality Use this procedure to adjust the white balance for bright pictures and dark pictures to achieve the desired color quality. Example: Adjusting the “WHITE BALANCE” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “COLOR TEMP.”. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to select “PRO”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ↔ PRO ← PRO : COLOR TEMP. * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Press the PROCEED button. The “WHITE BALANCE” screen appears. 5. Use the L and M buttons to select “RED-GAIN”. W H I T E BA L A N C E GAIN RED GREEN BLUE BIAS RED GREEN BLUE SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 6. Adjust the white balance using the � and � buttons. R-GAIN * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current setting is set and the previous screen reappears. 7. Once the adjustment is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Adjusting the white balance RGB-GAIN ....... White balance adjustment for signal level RGB-BIAS ....... White balance adjustment for black level � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. E-23 Reducing noise in the picture Use these settings if the picture has noise due to poor reception or when playing video tapes on which the picture quality is poor. Example: Setting “NR-3” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “PICTURE” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “NR”. P I C T U R E CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR TINT PICTURE MODE COLOR TEMP. NR MEMORY 2 OFF : : : R G SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Use the � and � buttons to select “NR-3”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → OFF ↔ NR-1 ↔ NR-2 ↔ NR-3 ← NR NR-3 : * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � NR * “NR” stands for Noise Reduction. * This function reduces noise in the picture. � Types of noise reduction There are three types of noise reduction. Each has a different level of noise reduction. The effect becomes stronger as the number increases (in the order NR-1 → NR-2 → NR-3). OFF ...............Turns the noise reduction function off. E-24 Sound Settings Menu Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance The treble, bass and left/right balance can be adjusted to suit your tastes. Example: Adjusting the bass Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “SOUND”, then press the PROCEED button. The “SOUND” screen appears. 2. To adjust the bass ... Use the L and M buttons to select “BASS”. S O U N D BASS TREBLE BALANCE L R SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. Adjust the bass using the � and � buttons. S O U N D BASS TREBLE BALANCE L R SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current selection is set and the previous screen reappears. To continue adjusting the sound ... Repeat from step 2. 4. Once the adjustment is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Note: If “CAN NOT ADJUST” appears... Set “AUDIO INPUT” on the OPTION menu correctly. Information � Sound settings menu BASS ..............Changes the level of low frequency sound. TREBLE ..........Changes the level of high frequency sound. BALANCE ....... Changes the balance of the left and right channels. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. E-25 3. Adjust using the � and � buttons. V–POSITION * If neither the � or � button is pressed within 5 seconds, the current setting is set and the previous screen reappears. To continue making other computer image adjustments ... Repeat from step 2. 4. Once all adjustments are completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � When “AUTO PICTURE” is “OFF” SCREEN MODE V–POSITION H–POSITION V–HEIGHT H–WIDTH AUTO PICTURE FINE PICTURE PICTURE ADJ. FULL : OFF : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT When Auto Picture is off, the Fine Picture and the Picture ADJ items are displayed so that you can adjust them. Screen Settings Menu Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj The position of the image can be adjusted and flickering of the image can be corrected. Example: Adjusting the vertical position in the normal mode Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “SCREEN”, then press the PROCEED button. The “SCREEN” menu appears. Default settings (when RGB/PC is selected) SCREEN MODE V–POSITION H–POSITION V–HEIGHT H–WIDTH AUTO PICTURE FINE PICTURE PICTURE ADJ. NORMAL : OFF : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT * The settings on the SCREEN menu are not preset at the factory. To select a mode ... Use the � and � buttons to select a mode. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → NORMAL ↔ FULL ← * The mode can also be switched by pressing the “WIDE” button on the remote control. 2. To adjust the vertical position ... Use the L and M buttons to select “V-POSITION”. SCREEN MODE H–POSITION V–HEIGHT H–WIDTH AUTO PICTURE FINE PICTURE PICTURE ADJ. NORMAL : OFF : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT V–POSITION E-26 Information � Adjusting the Auto Picture ON ...................The Picture ADJ and Fine Picture adjustments are made automatically. OFF .................The Picture ADJ and Fine Picture adjustments are made manually. � Adjusting the position of the image V-POSITION ... Adjusts the vertical position of the image. H-POSITION ... Adjusts the horizontal position of the image. V-HEIGHT ....... Adjusts the vertical size of the image. (Except for STADIUM mode) H-WIDTH ......... Adjusts the horizontal size of the image. (Except for STADIUM mode) FINE PICTURE*.. Adjusts for flickering. PICTURE ADJ* .... Adjusts for striped patterns on the image. * The Picture ADJ and Fine Picture features are available only when the “Auto Picture” is off. * The AUTO PICTURE, FINE PICTURE and PICTURE ADJ. are not available for VIDEO and HD/ DVD source. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults except for Auto Picture. Function Settings Menu Setting the on-screen menu When using the monitor for presentations, etc., the monitor can be set so that the input source, screen mode, etc., do not appear. Example: Turning the on-screen menu mode off Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “OSM”. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : 1 : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To turn the on-screen menu mode off ... Use the � and � buttons to select “OFF”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: ON ↔ OFF FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE OFF 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � OSM modes ON ...................The on-screen menu appears. OFF .................The on-screen menu does not appear. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. E-27 Adjusting the position of the menu display Use these operations to adjust the position of the menus that appear on the screen. Example: Adjusting the position of the menu display Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” menu appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “OSM ADJ.” F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 1 : 3. To adjust the position... Adjust using the � and � buttons. OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT F U N C T I O N F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 2 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET LONG LIFE RESET 1 : RGB3 ADJ. 4. Once all adjustments are completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Adjusting the position of the menu display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. The position can be set between 1 and 9. E-28 Setting the power management for computer images This energy-saving (power management) function automatically reduces the monitor’s power consumption if no operation is performed for a certain amount of time. Example: Turning the power management function on Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “POWER MGT”. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To turn the power management function on ... Use the � and � buttons to select “ON”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: ON ↔ OFF FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 ON 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Power management function * The power management function automatically reduces the monitor’s power consumption if the computer’s keyboard or mouse is not operated for a certain amount of time. This function can be used when using the monitor with a computer conforming to the VESA DPMS format. * If the computer’s power is not turned on or if the computer and selector tuner are not properly connected, the system is set to the off state. * For instructions on using the computer’s power management function, refer to the computer’s operating instructions. � Power management settings ON ...................In this mode the power management function is turned on. OFF .................In this mode the power management function is turned off. � Power management function and POWER/ STANDBY indicator The POWER/STANDBY indicator indicates the status of the power management function. See page E-29 for indicator status and description. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. E-29 POWER/STANDBY indicator Power management mode On Standby Suspend Off POWER/STANDBY indicator Green Orange Red Red Description Horizontal and vertical synchronizing signals are present from the computer. No horizontal synchronizing signals are sent from the computer. No vertical synchronizing signals are sent from the computer. No horizontal or vertical synchronizing signals are sent from the computer. Turning the picture back on Picture already on. Operate the keyboard or mouse. The picture reappears immediately. Operate the keyboard or mouse. The picture reappears, but more time is required than from the standby mode. Operate the keyboard or mouse. The picture reappears, but more time is required than from the standby mode or suspend mode. Power management operating status Not activated. Activated. Activated. Activated. E-30 Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen Use this procedure to set the gray level for the parts on the screen on which nothing is displayed when the screen is set to the 4:3 size. Example: Adjusting the “GRAY LEVEL” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “GRAY LEVEL”. F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To adjust the “GRAY LEVEL”... Use the � and � buttons to adjust the GRAY LEVEL. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 9 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � GRAY LEVEL This adjusts the brightness of the black (the gray level) for the sides of the screen. The standard is 0 (black). The level can be adjusted from 0 to 15. The factory setting is 3 (dark gray). � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting the picture to suit the movie The film image is automatically discriminated and projected in an image mode suited to the picture. [NTSC, 480I (60Hz), 1035I (60Hz), 1080I (60Hz) only] Example: Setting the “CINEMA MODE” to “OFF” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control unit to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “CINEMA MODE”. FU N C TIO N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To set the CINEMA MODE to “OFF” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “OFF”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: → ON ↔ OFF ← F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 OFF : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � CINEMA MODE ON ...................Automatic discrimination of the image and projection in cinema mode. OFF ................... Cinema mode does not function. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. E-31 Setting RGB3 ADJ. When the picture input from the RGB3 input terminal is distorted, select the most appropriate setting from among “1”, “2”, and “3”. Example: Setting “2” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “RGB3 ADJ.”. F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 1 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 3. To select “2”... Use the � and � buttons to select “2”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � buton is pressed: → 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ← F U N C T I O N OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT 2 : LONG LIFE RGB3 ADJ. RESET 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � When you adjust the RGB3 ADJ. The position of the menu display will change. In such a case, be sure to adjust the position. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Reducing burn-in of the screen The brightness of the screen, the position of the picture, and positive/negative mode are adjusted to reduce burn- in of the screen. Example: Setting “PLE” to “LOCK” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then proceed as follows. 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “LONG LIFE”, then press the PROCEED button. The “LONG LIFE” screen appears. 3. Use the L and M buttons to select “PLE”, then use the � and � buttons to select “LOCK”. The mode switch changes as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: AUTO ↔ LOCK 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the FUNCTION menu. To exit the main menu, press the EXIT button twice. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL CINEMA MODE ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : 1 : RGB3 ADJ. SEL. RETURN EXIT PROCEED OK LONG LIFE RESET LONG LIFE PLE ORBITER INVERSE OFF OFF LOCK : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT E-32 Information � PLE AUTO .............. The brightness of the screen is adjusted automatically to suit the picture quality. LOCK ..............The brightness level is set to minimum. � ORBITER ON ...................The picture moves around the screen intermittently. OFF .................Orbiter mode does not function. � INVERSE ON ..................... The picture is displayed alternately between positive image and negative image. OFF .................Inverse mode does not function. WT ..................The entire screen turns white. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” from the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Resetting to the default values Use these operations to restore all the picture adjustments, audio settings, to the factory default values. Refer to page E-18 for items to be reset. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “FUNCTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “FUNCTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “RESET”, then press the PROCEED button. FUNCTION OSM OSM ADJ. POWER MGT GRAY LEVEL LONG LIFE CINEMA MODE RESET ON 1 OFF 3 ON : : : : : SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED 1 : RGB3 ADJ. The “RESET” screen appears. 3. Use the L and M buttons to select “RESET”, then press the PROCEED button. RESET RESET RETURN OK RETURN EXIT PROCEED SETTING NOW RESET When the “SETTING NOW” screen disappears, the screen will be restored to the previous “RESET” mode, then all the settings are restored to the default values. 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. E-33 Option Settings Menu Setting the allocation of the audio connectors Setting the AUDIO 1, 2, and 3 connectors to the desired input. Example: Setting “AUDIO 1” to “VIDEO 2” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “AUDIO 1”. OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE VIDEO1 RGB1 RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT HD/DVD1 3. To set the AUDIO1 to “VIDEO2”... Use the � and � buttons to select “VIDEO2”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: → VIDEO1 ↔ VIDEO2 ↔ VIDEO3 ↔ HD/DVD1 ↔ RGB/PC1 ↔ RGB/PC2 ↔ RGB/PC3 ← OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO2 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � AUDIO INPUT A single audio input cannot be selected as the audio channel for more than one input terminal. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting the BNC connectors Select whether to set the input of the 5 BNC connectors to RGB or component. Example: Set the BNC SELECT mode to “COMP.” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “BNC SELECT”. OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set the BNC SELECT mode to “COMP.”... Use the � and � buttons to select “COMP.”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: → RGB ↔ COMP. ↔ SCART ← OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE COMP. AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. E-34 Information � BNC SELECT RGB ................ Uses the 5BNC terminal for RGB input. COMP. ............. Use the 3BNC terminal for component input. SCART ............ Use the 4BNC terminal for RGB with composite sync input. See page E-8. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select screen With the computer image, select the RGB Select mode for a moving image such as (video) mode, wide mode or digital broadcast. Example: Setting the “RGB SELECT” mode to “MOTION ” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “RGB SELECT”. AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT OPTION VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set the RGB select mode to “MOTION” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “MOTION”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: → AUTO ↔ STILL ↔ MOTION ↔ WIDE1 ↔ WIDE2 ↔ DTV ← OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB MOTION 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. E-35 Information � RGB SELECT modes One of these 6 modes must be selected in order to display the following signals correctly. AUTO .............. Select the suitable mode for the specifications of input signals as listed in the table “Computer input signals supported by this system” on page E-47. STILL ..............To display VESA standard signals. (Use this mode for a still image from a computer.) MOTION..........The video signal (from a scan converter) will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion image from a computer.) WIDE1............. When an 852 dot� 480 line signal with a horizontal frequency of 31.7kHz is input, the image may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB SELECT to WIDE1. WIDE2............. When an 848 dot� 480 line signal with a horizontal frequency of 31.0 kHz is input, the image may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB SELECT to WIDE2. DTV .................Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting (480P). See page E-47 for the details of the above settings. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical lines of the input high definition image is 1035 or 1080. Example: Setting the “1080B” mode to “1035I” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “HD SELECT”. OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set the HD SELECT mode to “1035I” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “1035I”. The mode switches as follows each time the � or � button is pressed: →1080A ↔ 1080B ↔ 1035I ← OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1035I ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � HD SELECT modes These 3 modes are not displayed in correct image automatically. 1080A ............... Special Digital broadcasts (for example : DTC100) 1080B ............... Standard digital broadcasts 1035I ...............Japanese “High Vision” signal format E-36 Setting the picture size for RGB input signals Use this procedure to switch the setting to “ON” or “OFF”. Example: Setting the “ON” mode to “OFF” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “OPTION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “OPTION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “PICTURE SIZE”. O P T I O N AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B ON : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 3. To set PICTURE SIZE mode to “OFF”... Use the � and � buttons to select “OFF”. The mode switches as follows when the � or � buttons are pressed: ON ↔ OFF OPTION AUDIO INPUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 AUDIO3 BNC SELECT RGB SELECT HD SELECT PICTURE SIZE RGB AUTO 1080B OFF : : : : : : : SEL. ADJ. RETURN EXIT VIDEO1 RGB1 HD/DVD1 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � PICTURE SIZE ON ..................... For RGB Input: “NORMAL” and “FULL” can be selected for Wide- Screen switching. OFF ................... For RGB Input: “TRUE” and “FULL” can be selected for Wide- Screen switching. � Restoring the factory default settings Select “RESET” under the function menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults. Information Menu Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals, and resolution Use this function to check the frequencies and polarities of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc. Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “INFORMATION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “INFORMATION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “FREQUENCY”, then press the PROCEED button. INFORMATION FREQUENCY LANGUAGE COLOR SYSTEM SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED 3. The frequency is displayed. F R E QU E N C Y H. FREQ V. FREQ H. POL V. POL 37.5KHz 75.0Hz NEG. NEG. : : : : MODE RESOLUTION 8 640�480 : : RETURN EXIT * Press the EXIT button to return to the previous screen. 4. Once you have checked the frequency ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. E-37 Setting the language for the menus The menu display can be set to one of seven languages: Japanese, English, German, French, Swedish, Italian or Spanish. Example: Setting the menu display to “DEUTSCH” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “INFORMATION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “INFORMATION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “LANGUAGE”, then press the PROCEED button. INFORMATION FREQUENCY LANGUAGE COLOR SYSTEM SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED The “LANGUAGE” screen appears. 3. To select “ DEUTSCH ” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “ DEUTSCH ”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → ENGLISH ↔ DEUTSCH ↔ FRANÇAIS ← → ↔ SVENSKA ↔ ITALIANO ↔ ESPAÑOL ← LANGUAGE LANGUAGE DEUTSCH : ADJ. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED 4. Press the PROCEED button. The display language is switched to Deutsch. 5. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. Information � Language settings ENGLISH ........ English DEUTSCH....... German FRANÇAIS ...... French ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish ITALIANO ........ Italian SVENSKA ....... Swedish .............. Japanese Setting the video signal format Use these operations to set the video signal format. Example: Setting the video signal format to “3.58 NTSC” Press the PROCEED button on the remote control to display the MAIN MENU on the screen, then... 1. Use the L and M buttons to select “INFORMATION”, then press the PROCEED button. The “INFORMATION” screen appears. 2. Use the L and M buttons to select “COLOR SYSTEM”, then press the PROCEED button. I N F O R M AT I O N FREQUENCY LANGUAGE COLOR SYSTEM SEL. RETURN EXIT OK PROCEED The “COLOR SYSTEM” screen appears. C O L O R S Y S T E M COLOR SYSTEM AUTO1 : ADJ. RETURN EXIT 3. To select “3.58 NTSC” ... Use the � and � buttons to select “3.58 NTSC”. The mode switches as follows when the � and � buttons are pressed: → AUTO1 ↔ AUTO2 ↔ 3.58NTSC ↔ 4.43NTSC ← → SECAM ↔ PAL-M ↔ PAL-N ↔ PAL60 ↔ PAL ← COLOR SYSTEM COLOR SYSTEM 3.58NTSC : ADJ. RETURN EXIT E-38 4. Once the setting is completed ... Press the EXIT button to return to the main menu. To delete the main menu, press the EXIT button once more. The color system is set to “3.58 NTSC”. Information � Video signal formats Different countries use different formats for video signals. Set to the format used in your current country. AUTO1/2 ......... The video signals are automatically detected and the format is set accordingly. AUTO1: 3.58NTSC, 4.43NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL60 AUTO2: PAL-M, PAL-N, 3.58NTSC PAL (B, G) ....... This is the standard format used mainly in the United Kingdom and Germany. SECAM............. This is the standard format used mainly in France and Russia. 4.43 NTSC, PAL60.............. This format is used for videos in countries using PAL and SECAM video signals. 3.58 NTSC ...... This is the standard format used mainly in Japan and the United States. PAL-M ............. This is the standard format used mainly in Brazil. PAL-N .............. This is the standard format used mainly in Argentina. E-39 External Control Application These specifications cover the communications control of the plasma monitor by external equipment. Connections Connections are made as described below. plasma monitor External equipment e.g., Personal computer 1) Connector on the plasma monitor side: EXTERNAL CONTROL connector. Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male No. Pin Name 1 No Connection 2 RXD (Receive data) 3 TXD (Transmit data) 4 DTR (DTE side ready) 5 GND 6 DSR (DCE side ready) 7 RTS (Ready to send) 8 CTS (Clear to send) 9 No Connection 1 5 9 6 2 3 4 7 8 2) Connector on the external equipment side: Serial port (RS-232C) connector. See the specifications of the equipment that is to be connected for the type of connector and the pin assignment. 3) Wiring Use a crossed (reverse) cable. Wire the cable so that each pair of data lines cross between the two devices. These data line pairs are RXD (Receive data) and TXD (Transmit data), DTR (DTE side ready) and DSR (DCE side ready), and RTS (Ready to send) and CTS (Clear to send). Communication Parameters (1) Communication system Asynchronous (2) Interface RS-232C (3) Baud rate 9600 bps (4) Data length 8 bits (5) Parity Odd (6) Stop bit 1 bit (7) Communication code Hex E-40 Communication Format Command 1 Unit ID 1 Unit ID 2 Command 2 Data length Data Check sum 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit Command 1 Command 1, along with command 2, is a number used to distinguish each command. In the case of ACK, when the lower order 4 bits is FH (as in 3FH and 7FH), this indicates that the commands and data of the supported equipment have been received. When the lower order 4 bits is BH (as in 3BH and 7BH), this indicates that unsupported commands and data have been received. Unit ID 1 and Unit ID 2 Unit ID 1 and unit ID 2 are numbers used to identify the equipment that is to be connected. 60H is used for the plasma monitor and 80H is used for external control equipment such as a personal computer. 1) Unit ID 1: Indicates the equipment sending the signal 2) Unit ID 2: Indicates the equipment receiving the signal Command 2 Command 2, along with command 1, is a number used to distinguish each command. Check Sum (CKS), Error Processing, and ACK 1) The check sum described below and RS-232C odd parity are used together for a check of the received data. The check sum is the lower order 8 bits of one frame of sent or received data comprising the sum total of Command 1, Unit ID 1 and 2, Command 2, Data Length, and Data. Check Sum Example DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 01H 08H Command 1 Unit ID 1 Unit ID 2 Command 2 Data Length Data Check Sum Total 208H L 2) Error Processing • When the communication interval is vacant for more than 4 ms, thereafter a received Command 1 will be recognized. If, at this time, meaningful data cannot be recognized, that data will not be recognized (as valid data). • An ACK will not be returned unless the receive data error, the check sum error, and the receive data are all taken in. E-41 Command Reference List CMD1 CMD2 LEN 01. Power ON 9FH 4EH 00H 02. Power OFF 9FH 4FH 00H 03. Input Switch Change DFH 47H 01H 04. VOLUME Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 05. SCREEN MODE Select DFH 51H 01H 06. AUDIO Mute On 9FH 3EH 00H 07. AUDIO Mute Off 9FH 3FH 00H 08. OSM Select DFH 58H 01H 09. Color Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 10. TINT Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 11. SHARPNESS Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 12. CONTRAST Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 13. BRIGHT Gain Data DFH 7FH 03H 14. Input MODE Request 1FH 41H 00H 15. RESET 1FH 54H 00H 16. COLOR TEMP SELECT DFH 00H 01H 17. RED Gain Data DFH 7FH 04H 18. GREEN Gain Data DFH 7FH 04H 19. BLUE Gain Data DFH 7FH 04H 20. Multi Screen Select DFH 07H 01H 21. VIDEO ADJ Request 1FH 45H 00H 22. Audio Select Set DFH 70H 02H 23. Audio Select Request 1FH 6FH 00H 24. LONG LIFE Set DFH 6BH 03H 25. Failure Mode Request 1FH 3FH 00H 01. Power ON Function The external control equipment switches on the power of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 4EH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the power is switched on. 3FH 60H 80H 4EH 00H CKS NOTE: Do not set the Power ON or Power OFF command continuously. 02. Power OFF Function The external control equipment switches off the power of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 4FH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the power is switched off. 3FH 60H 80H 4FH 00H CKS NOTE: Do not set the Power ON or Power OFF command continuously. 03. Input Switch Change Function The external control equipment switches the input of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 : Input Select 01H: Video1 02H: Video2 03H: Video3 05H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV1) 06H: HD2 (DTV2) 07H: RGB1/PC1 08H: RGB2/PC2 0CH: RGB3/PC3 ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the input is switched. 3FH 60H 80H 47H 00H CKS 04. VOLUME Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the VOLUME gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00 USER SOUND Gain Flag 05H DATA01 VOLUME Gain Flag 01H DATA02 VOLUME Gain 00H: Step 0 0AH: Step 10 (Default) 2AH: Step 42 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00 USER SOUND Gain Flag 05H DATA01 VOLUME Gain Flag 01H 05. SCREEN MODE Select Function The external control equipment switches the screen mode of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 02H : STADIUM 03H : ZOOM 04H : NORMAL 05H : FULL 06H : TRUE (REAL) ACK 7FH 60H 80H 51H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 02H : STADIUM 03H : ZOOM 04H : NORMAL 05H : FULL 06H : TRUE (REAL) E-42 Operation 06. AUDIO Mute On Function The external control equipment switches on AUDIO Mute of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H CKS ACK 3FH 60H 80H 3EH 00H CKS 07. AUDIO Mute Off Function The external control equipment switches off AUDIO Mute of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 9FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H CKS ACK 3FH 60H 80H 3FH 00H CKS 08. OSM Select Function The external control equipment switches on or off the on-screen menu (OSM) of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 58H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 01H : On-Screen menu On 02H : On-Screen menu Off ACK 7FH 60H 80H 58H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 01H : On-Screen menu On 02H : On-Screen menu Off On-Screen menu On/Off is equivalent to the On-Screen menu On/Off function of the convenient function settings. *Operation is as described in the table below. 09. COLOR Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the COLOR gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: COLOR Gain Flag 04H DATA02: COLOR Gain E0H: -32 * COLOR Gain is from -22 (EAH) to +22 (16H) only during video. FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: COLOR Gain Flag 04H 10.TINT Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the TINT gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: TINT Gain Flag 05H DATA02: TINT Gain E0H: -32 * TINT Gain is from -22 (EAH) to +22 (16H) only during video. FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: TINT Gain Flag 05H On-Screen Menu (OSM) Display of items and adjustments on the menu When screen menu is ON Yes Yes Yes No Volume display, input display, and screen size display When screen menu is OFF When screen menu is ON When screen menu is OFF Remote control operation Personal computer control operation No No Yes No E-43 11. SHARPNESS Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the SHARPNESS gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: SHARPNESS Gain Flag 06H DATA02: SHARPNESS Gain F0H: -16 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 10H:+16 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: SHARPNESS Gain Flag 06H 12. CONTRAST Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the CONTRAST gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: CONTRAST Gain Flag 07H DATA02: CONTRAST Gain CCH : -52 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 14H: +20 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: CONTRAST Gain Flag 07H 13. BRIGHT Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the BRIGHT gain data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BRIGHT Gain Flag 08H DATA02: BRIGHT Gain E0H: -32 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BRIGHT Gain Flag 08H 14. Input MODE Request Function The display returns the current input information by the external control equipment’ s request. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 41H 00H CKS ACK 7FH 60H 80H 41H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: Input Select 01H: Video1 02H: Video2 03H: Video3 04H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV1) 05H: RGB1/PC1 06H: RGB2/PC2 0AH:DVD (DVD1) 0CH:HD2 (DTV2) 0DH:DVD2 0EH:RGB3/PC3 15. RESET Function The external control equipment resets the user adjustment of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 54H 00H CKS ACK 3FH 60H 80H 54H 00H CKS 16. COLOR TEMP SELECT Function The external control equipment changes the COLOR TEMP of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 00H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00 00H: 1 01H: 2 02H: 3 03H: PRO ACK 7FH 60H 80H 00H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: 00H: 1 01H: 2 02H: 3 03H: PRO NOTE: Set so that at the selection of 1, 2, or 3 of COLOR TEMP change of the following R/G/B GAIN data cannot be accepted. E-44 17. RED Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the RED Gain Data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 04H DATA00 to DATA03 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: RED Gain Flag 01H DATA02: RED Gain 1 (Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: RED Gain 2 (Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: RED Gain Flag 01H 18. GREEN Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the GREEN Gain Data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 04H DATA00 to DATA03 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: GREEN Gain Flag 02H DATA02: GREEN Gain 1 (Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: GREEN Gain2 (Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: GREEN Gain Flag 02H 19. BLUE Gain Data Function The external control equipment changes the BLUE Gain Data of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 7FH 04H DATA00 to DATA03 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BLUE Gain Flag 03H DATA02: BLUE Gain1(Bias) D8H:-40 FFH:-1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: BLUE Gain2(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH:-1 00H: 0 IEH:+30 ACK 7FH 60H 80H 7FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: USER PICTURE Gain Flag 01H DATA01: BLUE Gain Flag 03H 20. Multi Screen Select Function The external control equipment selects single screen mode or multi screen mode of the display. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 07H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: Multi Screen 00: Single screen 01: Side by side 1 (Left screen bigger) 02: Side by side 2 (Left screen smaller) 03: Picture in Picture sub screen L 04: Picture in Picture sub screen R ACK The display returns the following ACK. 7FH 60H 80H 07H 01H DATA00 CKS DATA00: Multi Screen 00: Single screen 01: Side by side 1 (Left screen bigger) 02: Side by side 2 (Left screen smaller) 03: Picture in Picture sub screen L 04: Picture in Picture sub screen R When other commands (except POWER OFF) are sent while the screens are switching with this command, the other command will be returned as “Not Available” until screen switching is finished. E-45 21. VIDEO ADJ Request Function The display returns the video adjustments information by the external control equipment’s request. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 45H 00H CKS ACK 7FH 60H 80H 45H 0CH DATA00 to DATA0B CKS DATA00: RED Gain(Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA01: GREEN Gain(Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA02: BLUE Gain(Bias) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA03: COLOR Gain E0H: -32 * COLOR Gain is from -22 (EAH) to FFH: -01 +22 (16H) only during video. 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 DATA04: TINT Gain E0H: -32 * TINT Gain is from -22 (EAH) to FFH: -01 +22 (16H) only during video. 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 DATA05: SHARPNESS Gain F0H: -16 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 10H: +16 DATA06: CONTRAST Gain CCH: -52 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 14H: +20 DATA07: BRIGHT Gain E0H: -32 FFH: -01 00H: 0 01H: +01 20H: +32 DATA08: RED Gain(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA09: GREEN Gain(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA0A: BLUE Gain(Drive) D8H: -40 FFH: -1 00H: 0 IEH: +30 DATA0B: COLOR TEMP 00H: 1 01H: 2 02H: 3 03H: PRO E-46 22. Audio Select Set Function The external control equipment sets combinations of audio and video inputs for the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 70H 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: AUDIO INPUT 01H: AUDIO 1 02H: AUDIO 2 03H: AUDIO 3 DATA01: VISUAL INPUT 01H: Video 1 02H: Video 2 03H: Video 3 05H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV1) 06H: HD2 (DTV2) 07H: RGB 1/ PC 1 08H: RGB 2/ PC 2 0CH: RGB 3/ PC 3 ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when the input is switched. 3FH 60H 80H 70H 00H CKS * The plasma monitor returns “Not Available” when selecting the video input same as the one set at one of the AUDIO 01 to 3. Example: The plasma monitor returns “Not Available” when selecting the VIDEO1 for AUDIO2 or VIDEO3 after VIDEO1 has been set to AUDIO1. 23. Audio Select Request Function The external control equipment inquires the current combinations of audio and video inputs for the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 6FH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK: 7FH 60H 80H 6FH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00: AUDIO 1 01H – 0CH: VISUAL INPUT DATA DATA01: AUDIO 2 01H – 0CH: VISUAL INPUT DATA DATA02: AUDIO 3 01H – 0CH: VISUAL INPUT DATA VISUAL INPUT DATA 01H: Video 1 02H: Video 2 03H: Video 3 05H: HD (HD1 or DTV or DTV 1) 06H: HD2 (DTV2) 07H: RGB 1 /PC 1 08H: RGB 2 /PC 2 0CH: RGB 3 /PC 3 24. LONG LIFE Set Function The external control equipment sets the PLE, ORBITER, and INVERSE (inverse of image brightness) of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data DFH 80H 60H 6BH 03H DATA00 DATA01 DATA02 CKS DATA00 : PLE 01H: AUTO 02H: LOCK DATA01 : INVERSE 01H: ON 02H: OFF 03H: WHITE DATA02 : ORBITER (PICTURE SHIFT) 01H: ON 02H: OFF ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK when setting the PLE, ORBITER, and INVERSE (inverse of image brightness): 3FH 60H 80H 6BH 00H CKS 25. Failure Mode Request Function The external control equipment inquires the detection of failures of the plasma monitor. Transmission Data 1FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H CKS ACK The plasma monitor returns the following ACK: 7FH 60H 80H 3FH 02H DATA00 DATA01 CKS DATA00: FAILURE MODE 1 Bit 0 : PDP MODULE 0: Abnormal 1: Normal Bit 1 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 2 : TEMPERATURE 0: Abnormal 1: Normal Bit 3 : FAN 0: Abnormal 1: Normal Bit 4 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 5 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 6 : 1: fixed (backup) Bit 7 : 1: fixed (backup) DATA01:FILURE MODE 2 Bit 0–7 : 1: fixed (backup) E-47 Table of Signals Supported Supported resolution • When the screen mode is NORMAL, each signal is converted to a 1024 dots�768 lines signal. (Except for *2, 3, 4) • When the screen mode is TRUE, the picture is displayed in the original resolution. • When the screen mode is FULL, each signal is converted to a 1364 dots�768 lines signal. (Except for *3) Computer input signals supported by this system Screen mode Dots � lines 640�400 640�480 848�480 852�480*1 800�600 1024�768 1152�864 1280�768 1360�765 1360�768 1376�768 1280�1024 1600�1200 640�480 832�624 1024�768 1152�870 1280�1024 1280�1024 1152�900 1280�1024 1024�768 1280�1024 768�576 640�480 Vertical frequency (Hz) 70.1 59.9 72.8 75.0 85.0 100.4 120.4 60.0 60.0 56.3 60.3 72.2 75.0 85.1 99.8 120.0 60.0 70.1 75.0 85.0 100.6 75.0 56.2 60.0 60.0 59.9 60.0 75.0 85.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 66.7 74.6 74.9 75.1 60.0 71.2 72.0 66.0 76.0 76.1 60.0 60.0 50.0 59.9 Horizontal frequency (kHz) 31.5 31.5 37.9 37.5 43.3 51.1 61.3 31.0 31.7 35.2 37.9 48.1 46.9 53.7 63.0 75.7 48.4 56.5 60.0 68.7 80.5 67.5 45.1 47.7 47.7 48.3 64.0 80.0 91.1 75.0 81.3 87.5 93.8 35.0 49.7 60.2 68.7 64.6 75.1 78.1 61.8 71.7 81.1 49.7 63.9 31.4 31.5 NORMAL (4:3) YES*2 YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*3 YES*3 YES*3 YES*3 YES*3 YES – – – – – – – – YES*4 YES*4 YES*4 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*3 YES YES*4 YES*4 YES*4 YES YES YES*4 YES*3 YES*4 YES*7 YES*7 TRUE YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – FULL (16:9) YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*3 YES*3 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES*7 YES*7 RGB select*5 – – STILL – – STILL – – – – – – WIDE2 WIDE1 STILL STILL – – – – – – – – – – STILL – – STILL – – – – STILL WIDE1 WIDE1 WIDE1 WIDE2 STILL – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – MOTION *Apple Macintosh*6 Horizontal NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS NEG NEG POS POS NEG POS POS POS POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G NEG NEG – – C Sync C Sync C Sync – – – – NEG NEG Work Station (EWS4800) Work Station (HP) Work Station (SUN) Work Station (SGI) IDC-3000G Signal Type *IBM PC/AT compatible computers Vertical NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG NEG POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS NEG NEG POS POS NEG POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G Sync on G NEG NEG – – C Sync C Sync C Sync – – – – NEG NEG Sync Polarity Presence Horizontal YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – – – – – YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – YES YES Vertical YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES – – – – – – – – YES YES – – – – – – – – – – – – – – YES YES PAL625P NTSC525P Model DVI NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO YES NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO E-48 *1 Only when using a graphic accelerator board that is capable of displaying 852�480. *2 This signal is converted to a 1228 dots � 768 lines signal. *3 The picture is displayed in the original resolution. *4 The aspect ratio is 5:4. This signal is converted to a 960 dot�768 line signal. *5 Normally the RGB select mode suite for the input signals is set automatically. If the picture is not displayed properly, set the RGB mode prepared for the input signals listed in the table above. *6 To connect the monitor to Macintosh computer, use the supplied monitor adapter (D-Sub 15-pin) to your computer's video port. If your computer has a mini D-Sub 15-pin connector, you may have to use the supplied RGB cable. *7 Other screen modes (ZOOM and STADIUM) are available as well. NOTE: • While the input signals comply with the resolution listed in the table above, you may have to adjust the position and size of the picture or the fine picture because of errors in synchronization of your computer. • When a 1280 dot � 1024 line signal or 1600 dot � 1200 line signal is input to the monitor, the picture will be compressed. • This monitor has a resolution of 1365 dot � 768 line. It is recommended that the input signal should be XGA, wide XGA, or equivalent. • With digital input some signals are not accepted. • The sync may be disturbed when a nonstandard signal other than the aforementioned is input. • If you are connecting a composite sync signal, use the HD terminal. * “IBM PC/AT” and “VGA” are registered trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States. * “Apple Macintosh” is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. of the United States. E-49 Symptom Picture is disturbed. Sound is noisy. Remote control operates erroneously. The remote control does not work. Monitor’s power does not turn on when the remote control’s power button is pressed. Monitor does not operate when the remote control’s buttons are pressed. No sound or picture is produced. Picture appears but no sound is produced. Poor picture with VIDEO signal input. Poor picture with RGB signal input. Tint is poor or colors are weak. Nothing appears on screen. Part of picture is cut off or picture is not centered. Image is too large or too small. Picture is unstable. POWER/STANDBY indicator is lighted in orange or red. POWER/STANDBY indicator is blinking in red. POWER/STANDBY indicator is blinking in green. Checks • Is a connected component set directly in front or at the side of the display? • Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • Is the monitor’s power cord plugged into a power outlet? • Are all the monitor’s indicators off? • Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • Is the remote control pointed at the monitor, or is there an obstacle between the remote control and the monitor? • Is direct sunlight or strong artificial light shining on the monitor’s remote control sensor? • Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • The remote cable is plugged into the REMOTE IN terminal (Wired). • The front panel buttons of the main unit do not function. • Is the monitor’s power cord plugged into a power outlet? • Is the volume set at the minimum? • Is the mute mode set? • Are the speakers properly connected? • Is AUDIO INPUT set correctly? • Improper control setting. Local interference. Cable interconnections. Input impedance is not correct level. • Improper control setting. Incorrect 15 PIN connector pin connections. • Are the tint and colors properly adjusted? • Is the computer’s power turned on? • Is a source connected? • Is the power management function in the standby or off mode? • Is the position adjustment appropriate? • Is the screen size adjustment appropriate? • Is the computer’s resolution setting appropriate? • Horizontal and / or vertical sync signal is not present when the Intelligent Power Manager control is on. • The temperature inside the main unit has become too high and has activated the protector. —————— Remedy • Leave some space between the display and the connected components. • Replace both batteries with new ones. • Plug the monitor’s power cord into a power outlet. • Press the power button on the monitor to turn on the power. • Replace both batteries with new ones. • Point the remote control at the monitor’s remote control sensor when pressing buttons, or remove the obstacle. • Eliminate the light by closing curtains, pointing the light in a different direction, etc. • Replace both batteries with new ones. • Unplung the remote cable from the monitor. • The front panel buttons do not function during Control Lock. • Plug the monitor’s power cord into a power outlet. • Increase the volume. • Press the remote control’s MUTE button. • Connect the speakers properly. • Set AUDIO INPUT on the OPTION menu correctly. • Adjust picture control as needed. Try another location for the monitor. Be sure all connections are secure. • Adjust picture controls as needed. Check pin assignments and connections. • Adjust the tint and color (under “PICTURE”). • Turn on the computer’s power. • Connect source to the monitor. • Operate the computer (move the mouse, etc.). • Adjust the “SCREEN” properly. • Press the “WIDE” button on the remote control and adjust properly. • Set to the proper resolution. • Check the input signal. • Promptly switch off the power of the main unit and wait until the internal temperature drops. See*1. • Prompty switch off the power of the main unit. See *2. *1 Overheat protector If the monitor becomes too hot, the overheat protector will be activated and the monitor will be turned off. If this happens., turn off the power to the monitor and unplug the power cord. If the room where the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move the monitor to a cooler location and wait for the monitor to cool for 60 minutes. If the problem persists, contact your NEC dealer for service. *2 In the following case, power off the monitor immediately and contact your dealer or authorized NEC Service Center. The monitor turns off 5 seconds after powering on and then the POWER/STANDBY indicator blinks. It indicates that the power supply circuit or, one or more fans have been damaged. If the picture quality is poor or there is some other problem, check the adjustments, operations, etc., before requesting service. Troubleshooting E-50 Specifications Product Name PlasmaSync 61MP1 Plasma Monitor Product Code PX- 61XM1G Screen Size 53.2"(H)�29.9"(V) inches 1351(H)�760(V) mm diagonal 61" Aspect Ratio 16 : 9 Resolution 1365(H)�768(V) pixels Pixel Pitch 0.039"(H)�0.039"(V) inches 0.987(H)�0.987(V) mm Color Reproduction 256 levels, 16,770,000 colors Signals Synchronization Range Horizontal : 15.5 to 93.8 kHz (automatic : step scan) Vertical : 50.0 to 120 Hz (automatic : step scan) Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), PAL60, SECAM, HD*1 , DVD*1 , DTV*1 Input Terminals RGB Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin�1 Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)�1*3 Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-I 29-pin�1*2 (Not compatible with analog input) Video Visual 1 RCA-pin�1 Visual 2 BNC�1 Visual 3 S2-Video: DIN 4-pin�1 DVD/HD/DTV Visual RCA-pin (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])*1 Audio Stereo RCA�3 (selectable) External Control D-sub 9-pin�1(RS-232C) Sound output 7W+7W at 6 ohm Power Supply AC100-240V 50/60Hz Current Rating 8.3A (maximum) Power Consumption 660W (typical) Dimensions 58.3 (W)�35.0 (H)�4.7 (D) inches 1480 (W)�890 (H)�119(D) mm Weight 134.5 lbs / 61.0 kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature 0°C to 35°C / 32°F to 95°F Humidity 20 to 80% Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F Humidity 10 to 90% Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select, Volume up/down, OSM control Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP, DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Pointer, Zoom up/ down, Off timer, Wireless / Wired remote control OSM Functions Picture (Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Color / Tint / Picture mode / Color temperature / Noise reductions), Sound (Bass / Treble / Balance), Screen (V- Position / H-Position / V-Height / H- Width / Auto Picture / Fine picture / Picture adjustment), Function (OSM / OSM adjustment / Power management / Gray level / Cinema mode / RGB3 Adjustment, Long Life (PLE, Orbiter, Inverse, White) / Reset) / Option (Audio input / BNC select / RGBselect / HD select / Picture Size), Information (Frequency / Language / Color system) The features and specifications may be subject to change without notice. *1HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this system 480P (60 Hz) 480I (60 Hz) 525P (60 Hz) 525I (60 Hz) 625P (50 Hz) 625I (50 Hz) 720P (60 Hz) 1035I (60 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz) *2 It doesn’t cope with copy protection. *3 A change of DVD2/HD2 can be performed with RGB2. Other Features 3D motion adaptive Scan Converter (with 2-3 pull down Converter), Digital Zoom function (100-300% Selectable) (Tentative), Self Diagnosis, Anti Image Burn, Color Temperature Select, Control Lock, Power management, Plug and play (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only), Multi screen operation Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Remote cable, RGB cable (Mini D-Sub 15-pin to Mini D-Sub 15-pin connector), Power cord, User’s Manual, Safety metal fittings, Ferrite cores, Bands Regulations Meets class A requirements (EN55022, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3, EN55024) Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950, SEMKO Approved) Meets AS/NZS 3548 Class A Units are in inch (mm) 4.7" (119) 1.8" (45) 2.9" (74) 58.3" (1480) 35.0" (890) 53.9" (1380) 30.7" (790) Printed in Japan 7S800271 Printed on recycled paper TROUBLESHOOTING 4-1 1 TROUBLESHOOTING 1. Failure in the power supply In the case of any abnormality in the power supply like no power available, go to “1. No power available” (P. 2). 2. Video error (1) In the case of a video input error in VIDEO 1, 2, 3 (S-VIDEO), go to 2-1. “No video input signals available at VIDEO 1, 2, 3 (S-VIDEO)” (P. 6). (2) In the case of a video error in the RGB 1 and 2 input circuits, go to 2-2. “No video input signals available at the RGB 1 and 2 input circuits (P. 9). In this case, however, note the following: 1 If the error remains only in the interlace motion pictures, go to 2-5. “No interlace motion pictures gener- ated for VIDEO, DVD, HDTV, etc.” (P. 13). 2 If the error remains only in the progressive motion pictures, go to 2-6. “No progressive motion pictures generated” (P. 14). 3 If the error remains only in the still pictures of PC, etc., go to 2-7. “No still pictures of PC, etc. generated” (P. 15). (3) In the case of a video error in the DVD/HD input circuit, go to 2-3. “No video signals available at the DVD/HD input circuit (P. 10). If this error remains only in the progressive motion pictures, go to 2-6. “No progressive motion pictures generated” (P. 14). (4) If a video error occurs irrespective of any input selection, go to 2-4. “No video pictures available even with any input selection (P. 11). (Caution)If there is a description of and peripheral circuit in the flow chart, the circuits used to control the and the peripheral circuit (example: a bus from a microcomputer) are included. 2 1. No power available NO NO Is the POWER LED Is the power cord plugged to Make correct connections lit normally? the wall outlet correctly? with the wall outlet. YES YES NO Is 100V AC on the output The POWER unit is out of fuses F1 and F2? order. YES NO Is +7V available at Pin 1 of Disconnect the PW, PQ, and the PM connector (M +7V RS connectors from one system)? after another, and check whether +7V is available. If it is available, the circuit beyond the disconnected connector is out of order. If it is not available even after all the three connectors have been disconnected, something is wrong in the POWER unit or the MAIN YES PWB. NO Is +5V available at Pin 2 of S2601 (PWR PWB) and its IC9502 (MAIN PWB)? associated circuits are out of order. A YES NO From A of “Flashing in green Is +5V available at Pin 5 of A +5V line is out of order and red” (Cracks in the panel the LD connector, Pin 4 of the as far as its LED PWB, detected) (P. 4) PW connector, and Pin 5 of PWR PWB, and 232C PWB. the RS connector? YES IC9501 and its peripheral circuits are out of order. (Caution)When an LED is flashing (in the case of protector in operation), all power lines other than the M+7 system are automatically turned off. When checking these power lines other than the M+7 system, do it after connecting a circuit tester or the like to the measuring point, without fail. Flashing in green : Go to (1) (Fan error detected) Flashing in red : Go to (2) (Temperature error detected) Reciprocally flashing in green and red : Go to (3) (Cracks in the panel detected) Lit in green : Go to (4) 3 (1) Flashing in green (Fan error detected) NO NO Does the fan run when the Is the power supply (7 to 12V) IC9802 or IC9802 and pe- main power circuit is turned available at Pin 1 of P0F1, ripheral circuits are out of ON? P0F2? order. YES YES YES Is 5V available at Pin 3 of The fan is out of order, P0F1, P0F2? where 5V is available. Since this voltage becomes NO 0V when the power supply is turned off, this check should be carried out after connect- ing a circuit tester in advance. NO NO Is +5V available at Pins 13 to Is 5V available at Pin PN3? Failure in the POWER 16 of IC9805? unit or in another IC that uses A+5V. YES YES IC9805 and its peripheral IC9805 or IC9805 and peripheral circuits are out of order. circuits are out of order. (Caution)How to reset the alarm: • Turn the power circuit off and on at the main power supply. 4 (2) Flashing in red (Temperature error detected) NO YES Is the potential 0V at Pin 10 Is 5V available at Pins 13 to IC9806 or IC9806 and of IC9806 (MAIN PWB)? 15 of IC9806? peripheral circuits are out of order. YES NO NO Are TH1 in the POWER unit Is 5V available at Pin PN3? Failure in the POWER unit and its peripheral circuits out or in another IC that uses of order? A+5V. YES IC9806 or IC9501 and its peripheral circuits are out of order. (Caution) How to reset the alarm: • Turn the power circuit off and on at the main power supply. (3) Reciprocally flashing in green and red (Cracks in the panel detected) NO Is the potential 0V at Pin 100 IC9501 and peripheral circuits of IC9501 (MAIN PWB)? are out of order. YES NO YES Is the potential 0V at Pin 2 of Is 5V available at Pin 14 of IC9505 and peripheral cir- IC9505 (MAIN PWB)? IC9505? cuits are out of order. YES NO Failure in the periphery of the A PDP module circuit. Go to 1-1. “No power available” (P. 2). (Caution)How to reset the alarm: • Turn the power circuit [ON], with the input changeover key of the product kept pressed. In this state, keep on pressing the input changeover key for more than 2 seconds. 5 (4) Lit in green NO NO Can you hear the sound of Is the potential maintained at IC9501 and peripheral AC relay ON when the main the [H] level at Pin 79 of circuits are out of order. power circuit is turned ON? IC9501 (MAIN PWB)? YES YES NO Is the potential maintained at Pull out the PM connector the [H] level at Pin 3 of the and check the potential at PM connector? Pin 3 (MAIN PWB). If the [H] level is perceived, the POWER unit is out of order. If the potential is kept at the YES [L] level, IC9501 and periph- eral circuits are out of order. Failure in the POWER unit? YES Does it take more than 5 seconds IC9501 (MAIN PWB) and pe- when the main power circuit is ripheral circuits are out of order. turned on and then turned off? NO NO Is the potential maintained at the [H] level at Pin 3 of the PM connector? YES NO Is the potential maintained at Failure in the periphery of the the [H] level at Pin 1 of the PD PDP module. connector? YES YES Is the power supply available Failure in the HV system of the when the PD, PH, and AD PDP module and the POWER connectors are disconnected? unit, or in the periphery of the D+5V circuit. NO Disconnect the PV, PQ, PN, and PA connectors, one after another (with all others kept connected), and check whether the power supply functions normally. • When it functions: Failure in the circuit on the disconnected connector side. • When it does not function: Failure in the POWER unit. 6 Fig. 6� Signal Y at Pin 15 of IC5504 Fig. 7� Signal C at Pin 13 of IC5504 Fig. 4� Pins 7 and 10 of Connector P0YU� (horizontal sync signals) Fig. 5� Pins 9 and 12 of Connector P0YU� (vertical sync signals) 64us 64us 5Vpp 16ms 5Vpp 64us Burst section : 300mV 64us 1Vpp 16ms 2. Video error 2-1. No video input signals available at VIDEO 1, 2, 3 (S-VIDEO) YES YES Are the RGB signals available Are the horizontal sync signals Failure in the MAIN PWB. at Pins 1, 3, and 5 of the P0YU available at Pins 7 and 5 of the Details described in Item connector? (See Figs. 1 to 3.) P0YU connector and the vertical 2-5. (P.13) sync signals available at Pins NO 9 and 12? (See Figs. 4 and 5.) NO Failure in the VIDEO PWB. YES Are the RGB signals available IC5709 and peripheral circuits at TP5704 to TP5706? are out of order. (See Figs. 1 to 3.) NO YES Is the RGB signal output ge- IC5702, IC5704, IC5706, and nerated from Pins 41 to 43 of peripheral circuits are out of IC5504? (Similar waveforms order. in Figs. 1 to 3) NO YES Is the Y signal input applied to IC5504 and peripheral circuits Pin 15 of IC5504, and the C are out of order. signal input to Pin 13? (See Figs. 6 and 7.) NO Ternary Y/C separation is defective in the NTSC mode. →1 No pictures available only in NTSC mode (P.7) 3-line Y/C separation defective in the PAL mode. →2 No pictures available only in PAL mode (P.8) Conditions: 1. During the reception of VIDEO NTSC C- BAR 2. Mode VIDEO Fig. 1 Signal G� Pin 1 of Connector P0YU : 1.4Vpp� TP5704 ; 8Vp-p Fig. 2 Signal B� Pin 3 of Connector P0YU : 1.4Vpp� TP5705 ; 1.8Vpp Fig. 3 Signal R� Pin 5 of Connector P0YU : 1.4Vpp� TP5706 ; 1.8Vpp 7 1 No pictures available only in the NTSC mode (ternary Y/C separation defective) NO Is a composite signal available Failure in Q5302 to Q5305. at Pin 88 of IC5313? (See Fig. 8.) YES YES YES Are the Y/C signals available Are the Y/C signals available Failure in IC5306 to IC5309. at TP5310/TP5311? (Similar at TP5309/TP5308? waveforms in Figs. 9 and 10) (See Figs. 9 and 10.) NO NO Does oscillation take place at Q5320 to Q5327 and peripheral Pins 30 and 31 of IC5313? circuits are out of order. (See Fig. 11.) YES YES YES Is power fed to IC5313? Is power fed to IC5312? IC5313 or IC5312 is out of order. NO IC5316 and peripheral circuits are out of order. NO YES IC5313 and peripheral circuits IC5316 and peripheral circuits are out of order. are out of order. Conditions: 1. During the reception of VIDEO NTSC C-BAR 2. Mode VIDEO 64us 20MHz sine wave 2.3Vpp 16ms 0.9Vpp Burst section ; 300mVpp Fig. 8� Signal VIDEO at Pin 8 of IC5313 Fig. 9� Signal Y at TP5308 Fig. 10� Signal C at TP5309 Fig. 11� Oscillation waveform at Pin 30 of IC5313 1Vpp 8 2 No pictures available only in PAL mode (3-line Y/C separation defective) NO Is a composite signal available Failure in Q5302 to Q5305. at Pin 3 of IC5303? (See Fig. 8.) YES NO NO Are the Y/C signals available Is 5V available at the power T5302 disconnected or fail- at TP5304/TP5305? pin of IC5303? ure in the power supply. (See Figs. 12 and 13.) YES YES Are the Y/C signals available IC5303 is out of order. at TP5306/TP5307? (See Figs. 12 and 13.) NO YES Failure in IC5306 to IC5309. Failure in Q5306 to Q5310. Conditions: 1. During the reception of VIDEO PAL C-BAR 2. Mode VIDEO Fig. 12 Signal Y� TP5304 1.2Vpp� TP5306 1Vpp� � Fig. 13 Signal C� TP5305 Burst section : 300mVpp� TP5307 Burst section : 300mVpp� � 9 2-2. No video input signals available at the RGB 1 and 2 input circuits NO NO Are the RGB signals available Are the RGB signals available Failure in IC5703, IC5705, at Pins 1, 3, and 5 of the POPC at TP5701 to TP5703? and IC5707. connector? (See Fig. 14.) (See Fig. 14.) YES YES YES Are the HV signals available Failure in the MAIN PWB. Failure in IC5703, IC5705 at Pins 7, 9, 10, and 12 of the Details described in Item 2-7. and IC5707. POPC connector? (P.15) (See Figs. 15 and 16.) NO YES Are the HV signals available IC5861, IC5862, IC5872, at Pins 11, and 13 of IC5854? IC5873, and peripheral (Similar waveforms in Figs. circuits are out of order. 15 and 16) NO NO Are the HV signals available IC5710 to IC5713 and at TP5852 and TP5854? peripheral circuits are out of (See Figs. 17 and 18.) order. YES IC5854 and peripheral circuits are out of order. Conditions: 1. During the reception of PC VGA 60Hz/gray scale 2. Mode VIDEO Fig. 14 Signal RGB� Pins 1, 3, and 5 of connector P0PC Fig. 15 Horizontal Sync Signals� Pins 13 of IC5864 Fig. 16 Vertical Sync Signals� Pins 11 of IC5864 Fig. 17 Horizontal Sync Signals� TP5852 Fig. 18 Vertical Sync Signals� TP5854 32us 1Vpp 5Vpp 17ms 5Vpp 32us 17ms 5Vpp 5Vpp 10 2-3. No video signals available at the DVD/HD input circuit YES YES Are the Y, Pb, and Pr signals Are the HV signals available Failure in the MAIN PWB. available at Pins 1, 3, and 5 of at Pins 7, 9, 10, and 12 of the Details described in Item the P0YU connector? P0YU connector? 2-5. (P.13) (See Figs. 19 to 21.) (See Figs. 22 and 23.) NO NO Failure in the VIDEO PWB. YES Are the Pb and Pr signals Failure in IC5709. available at TP5704 to TP5706? (Similar waveforms in Figs. 19 to 21) NO IC5702, IC5704, and IC5706 are out of order. Conditions: 1. During the reception of HDTV (1080i) C-BAR 2. Mode HD Fig. 19 Signal Y� Pins 1 of Connector P0YU ; 1.3Vpp Fig. 20 Signal Pb� Pin 3 of Connector P0YU ; 1Vpp Fig. 22 Horizontal Sync Signals� Pins 7 and 10 of Connector P0YU ; 5Vpp Fig. 23 Vertical Sync Signals� Pins 9 and 12 of Connector P0YU ; 5Vpp Fig. 21 Signal Pr� Pin 5 of Connector P0YU ; 1Vpp 11 2-4. No video pictures available even with any input selection Apply an NTSC gray scale input to the VIDEO 1input circuit and select VIDEO Input1. NO Is the ON-screen display presented? Go to “Pictures and ON-screen display not available.” YES YES Are the signals of 3Vp-p applied to the signal input pins IC9403, IC9404, and peripheral circuits, (signal names: REV_LVDS, RODD_LVDS, etc.) of or the AD connectors are out of order. IC9403 and IC9404? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 130 to 185 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8502 and peripheral circuits are out of 190 to 244 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 54 to 122 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8003 and peripheral circuits are out of 200 to 12 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC7501 and peripheral circuits are out of 21 to 88 (Except for the power supply and the GND pin) order. of IC6501? NO (1)-1 12 (1)-1 NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to The VCC+5V system, IC9501, and Pins 124, 133,and 139 of IC6501? peripheral circuits are out of order. NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to The analog circuit of the MAIN PWB Pins 1, 3, and 5 of the YU connector? is out of order. NO The YU connector cable or the circuits before the VIDEO PWB are out of order. Go to “Pictures and ON-screen display not available.” NO Are pulses of 3Vp-p applied to Pins 38, 39, and 40 of IC9402, IC9501, and peripheral circuits the AD connector? are out of order. YES NO Are the horizontal/vertical sync signals of 3Vp-p available at IC9000, IC9501, and peripheral Pins 27 and 28 of IC9403, and the clock signals at Pin 31? circuit are out of order. YES NO Are the signals of 3Vp-p applied to the signal input pins IC9000, IC9501, and peripheral circuits (signal names: REV_LVDS, RODD_LVDS, etc.) of IC9403 are out of order. and IC9404? YES YES Is a correct display presented when the AD, or the PD, or the Each cable is defective. PH cable is replaced? NO YES Is a correct display presented when the MAIN PWB is The MAIN PWB is out of order. replaced? YES NO Are normal outputs of 170V, 70V, and D+5V available in the Go to 1. “No power available” (P. 2). POWER unit? YES The PDP module is out of order. 1Vp-p 1Vp-p Horizontal 49K 60Hz 38M Vertical Clock 13 2-5. No interlace motion pictures generated for VIDEO, DVD, HDTV, etc. Apply an NTSC gray scale input to the VIDEO 1 input circuit and select VIDEO Input 1. YES Are the signals of 3Vp-p applied to the signal input pins IC9403, IC9404, the AD connectors, and (signal names: REV_LVDS, RODD_LVDS, etc.) of peripheral circuits are out of order. IC9403 and IC9404? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 130 to185 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8502 and peripheral circuits are out of 190 to 244 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 54 to 122 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8003 and peripheral circuits are out of 200 to 12 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC7501 and peripheral circuits are out of 21 to 88 (Except for the power supply and the GND pin) order. of IC6501? NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to IC6501 and peripheral circuits are Pins 124, 133, and 139 of IC6501? out of order. NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to The analog circuit of the MAIN PWB Pins 1, 3, and 5 of the YU connector? is out of order. NO The YU connector cable or the circuits before the VIDEO PWB are out of order. 1Vp-p 1Vp-p 14 2-6. No progressive motion pictures generated Apply a 525p gray scale input to the DVD1/HD1 input circuit and select DVD1/HD1. YES Are the signals of 3Vp-p applied to the signal input pins IC9403, IC9404, and peripheral circuits, (signal names: REV_LVDS, RODD_LVDS, etc.) of or the AD connectors are out of order. IC9403 and IC9404? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 54 to 122 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8003 and peripheral circuits are out of 200 to 12 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 130 to 185 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8502 and peripheral circuits are out of 190 to 244 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC6701 and peripheral circuits are out of 21 to 88 (Except for the power supply and the GND pin) order. of IC6501? NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to IC6701 and peripheral circuits are Pins 124, 133, and 139 of IC6701? out of order. NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to The analog circuit of the MAIN PWB Pins 1, 3, and 5 of the YU connector? is out of order. NO The YU connector cable or the circuits before the VIDEO PWB are out of order. 1Vp-p 1Vp-p 15 2-7. No still pictures of PC, etc. generated Apply an XGA 60Hz gray scale input to the PC1 input circuit and select PC1. YES Are the signals of 3Vp-p applied to the signal input pins IC9403, IC9404, and peripheral circuits, or (signal names: REV_LVDS, RODD_LVDS, etc.) of the AD connectors are out of order. IC9403 and IC9404? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 54 to 122 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8003 and peripheral circuits are out of 200 to 12 (Except for the GND pin. Check the through order. holes, etc. to see whether the waveform appears at the terminals of IC8005) of IC8003? NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC9000 and peripheral circuits are out of 130 to 185 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC8502 and peripheral circuits are out of 190 to 244 (Except for the GND pin) of IC8502? order. NO YES Are pulses (of the video signal) of 3Vp-p applied to Pins IC6501 and peripheral circuits are out of 21 to 88 (Except for the power supply and the GND pin) order. of IC6701? NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to IC6701 and peripheral circuits are Pins 124, 133, and 139 of IC6701? out of order. NO YES Is the video signal of 1Vp-p applied to The analog circuit of the MAIN PWB Pins 1, 3, and 5 of the PC connector? is out of order. NO The YU connector cable or the circuits before the VIDEO PWB are out of order. 1Vp-p 1Vp-p METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 5-1 1 METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS Adjustments should be carried out in accordance with the procedures described below. However, any adjustments other than the items A to C below are not required. A. When the PDP module is replaced, adjust the sections according to the adjusting items 1 to 3 specified below. B. When the power unit is replaced, adjust the sections according to the adjusting items 1 to 3 specified below. C. When the MAIN PWB or the VIDEO PWB is replaced, adjust the sections according to the adjusting item 4 specified below. (CAUTION) When you exchange PDP module, please be sure to clear integrated time to “0” by the following “How to clear the integrated time”. * How to clear the integrated time Assume the folloing factory mode by the use of the remote control. Press “PROCEED” key six times to get the screen of “USAGE TIME”. In this state, the integrated time up to the present time is displayed. The integrated time is cleared to “0” when the remote control keys are pressed in the order of “MUTE” → POSITION “UP” → POSITION “DOWN” → “OFF TIMER”. * How to enter or withdraw from the factory setting mode: Press the keys in the sequential order of [OFF TIMER] → [EXIT] → [MUTE] → [OFF TIMER]. When a conventional remote control is used: Press the keys in the sequential order of [OFF TIMER] → [OK] → [MUTE] → [OFF TIMER]. At that time, use the [MENU] key in place of the [PROCEED] key. 1. Adjustment of +170V (1) Using any video signal of VIDEO input, DVD/HD input, or RGB input, and display a color bar signal. Turn on the power switch of the main unit. (2) Turn the volume control (RV4) in the [+170V ADJ] section of the power unit, and adjust the voltage value between TP3 (+170V output) and TP4 (GND) of the power unit so that this voltage settles within the range of “specified voltage of the PDP module (Value Vs on the label shown below) ± 1V.” SERIAL NO.� ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗� Vd=∗∗V� Vs=∗∗∗V� CODE -01 FAN (Caution) The figure below shows a rear side view when the back cover has been removed. 2 2. Adjustment of +70V (1) Using any video signal of VIDEO input, DVD/HD input, or RGB input, and display a color bar signal. Turn on the power switch of the main unit. (2) Confirm that the voltage value between TP2 (+70V output) and TP4 (GND) of the power unit is maintained at “70 ± 1V.” Otherwise, turn the volume control (RV3) in the [D+70V ADJ] section so that the voltage value is maintained at “70 ± 1V.” 3. Adjustment of +5V (1) Use any video signal of VIDEO input, DVD/HD input, or RGB input, and display a color bar signal. (2) Confirm that the voltage value between TP1 (+5V output) and TP4 (GND) of the power unit is maintained at “5.1 ± 0.1V.” Otherwise, turn the volume control (RV2) in the [+5V ADJ] section so that the voltage value is maintained at “5.1 ± 0.1V.” * POWER unit layout PD PH TP3� D+170 TP4� D. GND TP1� D+5 RV2� D+5 ADJ RV3� D+70� ADJ TP2� D+70 RV4� D+170� ADJ P� M P� N P� Q P� V P� A P� I 3 v v v v v v 4. Screen position and phase adjustment Adjustment of the range of horizontal display presented at the PDP module Adjustment of the range of vertical display presented at the PDP module Adjustment of the signal position in horizontal direction within the H POS display range Adjustment of the signal position in vertical direction within the V POS display range 4-1. Adjustment of the VIDEO screen position Make correct adjustments of the display range with [MHPOS] and [MVPOS]. (1) Enter an input of NTSC monoscopic signal in the VIDEO input terminal. (2) Select the VIDEO input by the use of the relevant key of the remote control or the CTL PWB. (3) Enter the factory shipment setting mode by using the factory shipment control command of the remote control. (4) Press the [PROCEED] key to obtain the [POSITION] screen. (5) Press the [WIDE] key to select the [STADIUM] mode. ([STADIUM] mode in the initial state) (6) In case of any deviation from the display range of the PDP module, press the cursor key [ ] or [v] of the remote control to select [MHPOS] or [MVPOS]. Press the cursor key [<] or [>] for adjustments. (7) Press the cursor key [ ] or [v] of the remote control to select [H POS]. (8) Press the cursor key [<] or [>] for adjustments so that the right and left are balanced. (9) Press the cursor key [ ] or [v] of the remote control to select [V POS]. (10) Press the cursor key [<] or [>] for adjustments so that the upper and lower are balanced. (11) Confirm that [H PHA] is maintained at 0. (12) Confirm that [H CLK] is maintained at 0. (13) In the same manner, press the [WIDE] key to select the [ZOOM] mode, the [NORMAL] mode, or the [FULL] mode. Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions, and confirm that [H PHA] and [H CLK] are maintained at 0, respectively. (14) Change the input signal to the PAL monoscopic signal and repeat the steps of (4) to (14) above. (15) Withdraw from the factory mode. 4-2. Adjustment of the DVD/HD screen position Make correct adjustments of the display range with [MHPOS] and [MVPOS]. (1) Enter an input of HDTV monoscopic signal in the DVD/HD input terminal. According to the “convenient functional setting” in the [MENU] screen, press the cursor key [^] or [v] of the remote control to confirm that [HD SELECT] has been set at [1035i]. (2) Select the HD input by the use of the relevant key of the remote control or the CTL PWB. (3) Enter the factory shipment setting mode by using the factory shipment control command of the remote control. (4) Press the [PROCEED] key to obtain the [POSITION] screen. (5) In case of any deviation from the display range of the PDP module, press the cursor key [ ] or [v] of the remote control to select [MHPOS] or [MVPOS]. Press the cursor key [<] or [>] for adjustments. (6) Press the cursor key [ ] or [v] of the remote control to select [H POS]. (7) Press the cursor key [<] or [>] for adjustments so that the right and left are balanced. (8) press the cursor key [ ] or [v] of the remote control to select [V POS]. (9) Press the cursor key [<] or [>] for adjustments so that the upper and lower are balanced. (10) Confirm that [H PHA] is maintained at 0. (11) Confirm that [H CLK] is maintained at 0. (12) Change the input video signal to the NTSC component signal and repeat the steps of 1-1 (3) to (11) above. (13) Change the input video signal to the DTV 1080i signal and repeat the steps of 1-1 (3) to (11) above. (14) Change the input video signal to the DTV 1080i signal. Press the cursor key [<] or [>] of the remote control to select [1080B] for [HDS] of the screen. Repeat the steps of 1-1 (3) to (11) above. Return [HDS] to [1080i]. (15) Change the input video signal to the DTV 720P signal and repeat the steps of 1-1 (3) to (11) above. (16) Change the input video signal to the DTV 480P signal and repeat the steps of 1-1 (3) to (11) above. (17) Withdraw from the factory shipment setting mode. 4 [Morgue] 1. Signal Generator (1) Digital RGB and component signal generator • Equivalent to the Video Generator LT1615 (made by LEADER) • Equivalent to the Panel Adapter LT9217 (made by LEADER) • Equivalent to the Video Encoder LT1606 (made by LEADER) (2) NTSC signal generator • Equivalent to the NTSC Pattern Generator LCG-403YC (made by LEADER) (3) PAL signal generator • Equivalent to the Color Bar Pattern Generator PM5518 (made by PHILIPS) 2. VIDEO input Input: Composite video input or S-terminal input for one system 3. DVD/HD/DTV input 3-1. HD: Y/Pb/Pr component input, tri-sync signal 3-2. DVD: Y/B-Y/R-Y component input (HD/DVD in common) 700 300 300 Y Pb Pr 350 350 100% color bar signal (mVp-p) Y 525 300 525 700 (all white) Cb Cr 75% color bar signal (mVp-p) 5 4. RGB/PC input 1) Horizontal sync period (2) Vertical sync period * The data a to j above are specified in the next page and thereafter, classified for various inspection signals. a b c d e Video signal 0.7Vp-p Sync signal TTL level Positive/negative polarity f g h i j Video signal 0.7Vp-p Sync signal TTL level Positive/negative polarity 6 PC mode 1 2 3 4 5 Signal name VU-6010 VU-6010 PC98 IBM PC98 NTSC PAL/SECAM 400@56Hz 400@70Hz 480@60HZ Definition 640*240 768*288 640*400 640*400 640*480 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 12.214 14.752 21.053 25.175 25.175 H frequency (kHz) 15.734 15.557 24.826 31.469 31.469 V frequency (Hz) 59.94 50.39 56.423 70.086 59.94 H total (uS) 63.534 64.262 40.285 31.778 31.778 (dots) 776 948 848 800 800 H display period (uS) 52.4 52.06 30.4 25.422 25.422 (dots) 640 768 640 640 640 H front porch (uS) 1.146 1.288 2.803 0.675 0.596 (dots) 14 19 59 17 15 H sync pulse width (uS) 8.76 8.677 3.04 2.542 3.813 (dots) 107 128 64 64 96 H back porch (uS) 1.228 2.237 4.037 3.138 1.946 (dots) 15 33 85 79 49 V total (mS) 16.652 20.055 17.723 14.268 16.683 (line) 262 312 440 449 525 V display period (mS) 15.3 18.513 16.112 12.711 15.253 (line) 240 288 400 400 480 V front porch (mS) 0.191 0.321 0.282 0.413 0.191 (line) 3 5 7 13 6 V sync pulse width (mS) 1.144 1.093 0.322 0.064 0.064 (line) 18 17 8 2 2 V back porch (mS) 0.064 0.064 1.007 1.08 1.176 (line) 1 1 25 34 37 H sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg Neg V sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg Neg Scan type Interlaced Interlaced Non Non Non Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced 5. RGB/PC signal timing table 7 PC mode 6 7 8 9 10 Signal name MAC@13” VESA VESA VESA XGA-2 480@72Hz 480@75Hz 480@85Hz 480@75HZ Definition 640*480 640*480 640*480 640*480 640*480 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 30.24 31.5 31.5 36.0 31.5 H frequency (kHz) 35 37.861 37.5 43.269 39.375 V frequency (Hz) 66.667 72.809 75 85.008 75 H total (uS) 28.571 26.413 26.667 23.111 25.4 (dots) 864 832 840 832 800 H display period (uS) 21.164 20.317 20.317 17.778 20.32 (dots) 640 640 640 640 640 H front porch (uS) 2.116 0.762 0.508 1.556 0.508 (dots) 64 24 16 56 16 H sync pulse width (uS) 2.116 1.27 2.032 1.556 3.048 (dots) 64 40 64 56 96 H back porch (uS) 3.175 4.064 3.81 2.222 1.524 (dots) 96 128 120 80 48 V total (mS) 15 13.735 13.333 11.764 13.333 (line) 525 520 500 509 525 V display period (mS) 13.714 12.678 12.8 11.093 12.19 (line) 480 480 480 480 480 V front porch (mS) 0.086 0.237 0.027 0.023 0.279 (line) 3 9 1 1 11 V sync pulse width (mS) 0.086 0.079 0.08 0.069 0.051 (line) 3 3 3 3 2 V back porch (mS) 1.114 0.739 0.427 0.578 0.813 (line) 39 28 16 25 32 H sync polarity Sync on G Neg Neg Neg Neg V sync polarity Sync on G Neg Neg Neg Neg Scan type Non Non Non Non Non Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced 8 PC mode 11 12 13 14 15 Signal name VESA VESA VESA VESA VESA 600@56Hz 600@60Hz 600@72Hz 600@75Hz 600@85Hz Definition 800*600 800*600 800*600 800*600 800*600 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 36 40 50 49.5 56.25 H frequency (kHz) 35.156 37.879 48.077 46.875 53.674 V frequency (Hz) 56.25 60.317 72.188 75 85.061 H total (uS) 28.444 26.4 20.8 21.333 18.631 (dots) 1024 1056 1040 1056 1048 H display period (uS) 22.222 20 16 16.162 14.222 (dots) 800 800 800 800 800 H front porch (uS) 0.667 1 1.12 0.323 0.569 (dots) 24 40 56 16 32 H sync pulse width (uS) 2 3.2 2.4 1.616 1.138 (dots) 72 128 120 80 64 H back porch (uS) 3.556 2.2 1.28 3.232 2.702 (dots) 128 88 64 160 152 V total (mS) 17.778 16.579 13.853 13.333 11.756 (line) 625 628 666 625 631 V display period (mS) 17.067 15.84 12.48 12.8 11.179 (line) 600 600 600 600 600 V front porch (mS) 0.028 0.026 0.77 0.021 0.019 (line) 1 1 37 1 1 V sync pulse width (mS) 0.057 0.106 0.125 0.064 0.056 (line) 2 4 6 3 3 V back porch (mS) 0.626 0.607 0.478 0.448 0.503 (line) 22 23 23 21 27 H sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. V sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Scan type Non Non Non Non Non Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced 9 PC mode 16 17 18 19 20 Signal name MAC@16” I/O dater CEREB VESA wide VESA wide wide wide 1 (NEC 1) (NEC 2) Definition 832*624 852*480 864*480 848*480 1024*576 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 57.2832 34.006 42.526 33.75 47.25 H frequency (kHz) 49.725 31.722 37.5 31.02 35.795 V frequency (Hz) 74.55 59.966 75 60 60.059 H total (uS) 20.111 31.524 26.667 32.237 27.937 (dots) 1152 1072 1134 1088 1320 H display period (uS) 14.524 25.055 20.317 25.126 21.672 (dots) 832 852 864 848 1024 H front porch (uS) 0.559 0.659 0.508 0.474 0.339 (dots) 32 22 22 16 16 H sync pulse width (uS) 1.117 3.764 2.032 3.319 3.048 (dots) 64 128 86 112 144 H back porch (uS) 3.91 2.047 3.81 3.319 2.878 (dots) 224 70 162 112 136 V total (mS) 13.414 16.676 13.333 16.667 16.65 (line) 667 529 500 517 596 V display period (mS) 12.549 15.132 12.8 15.474 16.091 (line) 624 480 480 480 576 V front porch (mS) 0.02 0.378 0.027 0.193 0.056 (line) 1 12 1 6 2 V sync pulse width (mS) 0.06 0.095 0.08 0.258 0.112 (line) 3 3 3 8 4 V back porch (mS) 0.784 1.072 0.427 0.741 0.391 (line) 39 34 16 23 14 H sync polarity Sync on G Neg Pos. Pos. Pos. V sync polarity Sync on G Neg Neg Pos. Pos. Scan type Non Non Non Non Non Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced 10 PC mode 21 22 23 24 25 Signal name VESA wide VESA wide CEREB VESA VESA (NEC 3) (NEC 4) wide 2 768@60Hz 768@70Hz Definition 1280*720 1360*768 1024*600 1024*768 1024*768 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 76.5 85.5 51.2 65 75 H frequency (kHz) 45.106 47.712 37.879 48.363 56.476 V frequency (Hz) 60.142 60.015 60.317 60.004 70.069 H total (uS) 22.17 20.959 26.4 20.677 17.707 (dots) 1696 1792 1352 1344 1328 H display period (uS) 16.732 15.906 20 15.754 13.653 (dots) 1280 1360 1024 1024 1024 H front porch (uS) 0.627 0.749 1 0.369 0.32 (dots) 48 64 51 24 24 H sync pulse width (uS) 2.301 1.310 3.2 2.092 1.813 (dots) 176 112 164 136 136 H back porch (uS) 2.51 2.994 2.2 2.462 1.92 (dots) 192 256 113 160 144 V total (mS) 16.627 16.662 15.579 16.666 14.272 (line) 750 795 628 806 806 V display period (mS) 15.962 16.097 15.84 15.88 13.599 (line) 720 768 600 768 768 V front porch (mS) 0.089 0.063 0.026 0.062 0.053 (line) 4 3 1 3 3 V sync pulse width (mS) 0.177 0.126 0.106 0.124 0.106 (line) 8 6 4 6 6 V back porch (mS) 0.399 0.377 0.607 0.6 0.513 (line) 18 18 23 29 29 H sync polarity Pos. Pos. Neg Neg. Neg. V sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. Neg. Neg. Scan type Non Non Non Non Non Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced 11 PC mode 26 27 28 29 30 Signal name VESA VESA MAC@19” VESA VESA 768@75Hz 768@85Hz 1024@60Hz 1024@75Hz Definition 1024*768 1024*768 1024*768 1280*1024 1280*1024 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 78.75 94.5 80 108 135 H frequency (kHz) 60.023 68.677 60.24 63.981 79.976 V frequency (Hz) 75.029 84.997 74.93 60.02 75.025 H total (uS) 16.66 14.561 16.600 15.63 12.501 (dots) 1312 1376 1328 1688 1688 H display period (uS) 13 10.836 12.8 11.852 9.481 (dots) 1024 1024 1024 1280 1280 H front porch (uS) 0.203 0.508 0.4 0.444 0.119 (dots) 16 48 32 48 2 H sync pulse width (uS) 1.219 1.016 1.2 1.037 1.067 (dots) 96 96 96 112 144 H back porch (uS) 2.235 2.201 2.2 2.296 1.837 (dots) 176 208 176 248 248 V total (mS) 13.328 11.765 13.347 16.661 13.329 (line) 800 808 804 1066 1066 V display period (mS) 12.795 11.183 12.749 16.005 12.804 (line) 768 768 768 1024 1024 V front porch (mS) 0.017 0.015 0.050 0.016 0.013 (line) 1 1 3 1 1 V sync pulse width (mS) 0.05 0.044 0.050 0.047 0.038 (line) 3 3 3 3 3 V back porch (mS) 0.466 0.524 0.498 0.594 0.475 (line) 28 36 30 38 38 H sync polarity Pos. Pos. — Pos. Pos. V sync polarity Pos. Pos. — Pos. Pos. Scan type Non Non Non Non Non Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced Interlaced 12 PC mode 31 32 33 34 35 Signal name IDC-3000G IDC-3000G HDTV-J DTV (480P) DTV (720P) PAL 625P NTSC 525P Definition 768*576 640*480 1920*1034 644*483 1280*720 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 29.687 24.39 74.25 24.37 74.25 H frequency (kHz) 31.389 31.47 33.75 31.469 45.000 V frequency (Hz) 50 59.9 60/60 59.94 60 H total (uS) 31.933 31.775 29.63 31.777 22.222 (dots) 948 775 2200 774 1650 H display period (uS) 25.87 26.24 25.86 26.427 17.239 (dots) 768 640 1920 644 1280 H front porch (uS) 0.269 0.41 0.59 0.75 0.943 (dots) 8 10 44 18 70 H sync pulse width (uS) 2.526 2.46 0.59 2.35 1.077 (dots) 75 60 44 57 80 H back porch (uS) 3.267 2.665 2.59 2.25 2.963 (dots) 97 65 192 55 220 V total (mS) 19.911 16.522 16.652 16.683 16.667 (line) 625 525 562/562 525 750 V display period (mS) 18.35 15.106 15.319 15.348 (line) 576 480 517/517 483 720 V front porch (mS) 0.223 0.252 0.148 0.191 0.111 (line) 7 8 5 6 5 V sync pulse width (mS) 0.223 0.22 0.148 0.191 0.111 (line) 7 7 5 6 5 V back porch (mS) 1.115 0.944 1.037 0.953 0.444 (line) 35 30 35 30 20 H sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg Neg V sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg Neg Scan type Non Non Interlaced Non Non Interlaced Iinterlaced Interlaced Interlaced 13 PC mode 36 37 38 39 Signal name HDTV-W SSPE JSPE MAC@12” Definition 1920*1080 1024*512 852*480 1152*870 Dot clock frequency (MHz) 74.25 40 16 100 H frequency (kHz) 33.75 33.727 15.75 68.681 V frequency (Hz) 60/60 60.012 59.94 75.062 H total (uS) 29.630 29.650 63.750 14.560 (dots) 2200 1186 1020 1456 H display period (uS) 25.859 25.600 53.250 11.520 (dots) 1920 1024 852 1152 H front porch (uS) 0.593 0.600 1.250 0.320 (dots) 44 24 20 32 H sync pulse width (uS) 1.185 1.200 4.750 1.280 (dots) 88 48 76 128 H back porch (uS) 1.993 2.250 4.500 1.440 (dots) 148 90 72 144 V total (mS) 16.652/16.682 16.663 16.683 13.322 (line) 562/563 562 262.5/262.5 915 V display period (mS) 16.000/16.000 15.15 15.236/15.236 12.667 (line) 540/540 511 239/239 870 V front porch (mS) 0.059/0.074 0.178 0.064/0.096 0.044 (line) 2/2.5 6 1/1.5 3 V sync pulse width (mS) 0.148/0.148 0.148 0.191/0.191 0.044 (line) 5/5 5 3/3 3 V back porch (mS) 0.444/0.459 1.186 1.211/1.243 0.568 (line) 15/15.5 40 19/19.5 39 H sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Sync on G V sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Sync on G Scan type Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Interlaced CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 6-1 1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Note) In regard to the contents of the text, please refer also to the relevant circuit dia- grams. I Power unit block [Including the power-related µ-COM (microcomputer) operation] • When a commercial power input is fed from an AC inlet, the power unit begins to generate an output of M+7V for the µ-COM system. M+7V is supplied to IC9502 from Pin 1 of the PM connector. When the main POWER SW (S2601) is turned ON, M+5V is supplied to the µ-COM (IC9501). With the supply of M+5V, the µ-COM supplies a “POWER” signal to the power unit to actuate it. • When the [H] input of the “POWER” signal is fed from Pin 3 of the PM connector, RL1 is turned ON to generate power outputs for the signal system (D+5V, D+3.3, A+14V, A+5V, S+13V, S-13V). These power outputs are fed to the respective signaling circuits. After each signaling power supply has been fed (for 200msec or more), the power outputs (D+170V, D+70V) are fed to the HV system, and extended further to the PDP module. • When the temperature in the power unit attains about 100°C, the T-ALM2 signal begins to feed an “L” signal to the MAIN PWB (µ-COM) from Pin 8 of the PN connector. The µ-COM turns the “POWER” signal at the “L” level to turn off the power supply. In this state, the LED flashes in red. (T-ALM1 is not used.) • When an LVP signal at the “L” level from the PDP module is entered in Pin 37 (MAIN PWB) of the AD connector and in Pin 1 (power unit) of the PD connector, the µ-COM turns the “POWER” signal at the “L” level and makes the LED “flash in red and green reciprocally.” The power unit turns off all the power supplies other than the M+7V system. • The POMUTE signal is used to detect AC OFF first of all and supplies an “L” output to Pin 4 of the PM connector. This signal is fed to Pin 93 of the µ-COM and Pin 4 of the AE connector (AUDIO unit). This circuit is used to perceive the occurrence of commercial power OFF due to a service interruption or a certain cause (prevention of misoperation). It is also used for MUTE. 2 I VIDEO PWB Block 1. AUDIO block The AUDIO signal input entered from M1008 to M1010 is controlled and selected by I2C bus control of IC5001 (MM1311BD: SW). The selected AUDIO signal is output from the AB connector to the AUDIO AMP module via IC5002 (BA4558: buffer). 2. PC block The video signals (RGB signals) from M1006 and M1007 are selected at IC5703, IC5705, and IC5707, and then output to the MAIN PWB via IC5708 (AD8023: buffer) and the PC connector. 3. HD block The video signals (Y, Pb, Pr signals) from M1006 and M1007 are selected at IC5714 to IC5716. The selected signals are changed over with the signals from M1005 at IC5004 to 5006. The selected video signals (Y, Pb, Pr signals) are further changed over with the signals on the VIDEO input side at IC5702, 5704, and 5706. The resultant outputs are sent to the MAIN PWB via IC5709 (AD8023; buffer) and the YU connector. M1006 input M1007 input IC5703~� IC5705 ; SW IC5708 ;� BUFER To the MAIN PWB M1006 input M1007 input M1005 inpit IC5714~� IC5716 ; SW IC57089� BUFER IC5004~� IC5006 ; SW IC5702,� IC5704,� IC5706,� ; SW To the MAIN PWB RGB signal after the decoding � of the VIDEO signal 3 4. VIDEO block The external VIDEO signal input is entered from M1001 to M1003, and selected at IC5001 (MM1311BD: SW). The composite signals of the IC5001 output are applied to the ternary Y/C separator circuit and the 3-line Y/C separator circuit. The Y/C signal input separated at each Y/C separator circuit is entered in IC5306 to 5309. At the same time, the composite signals are also entered in IC5306 to 5309 directly. The Y/C signal output of IC5001 is directly entered in IC5306 to 5309. When the input signal is of 3.58 NTSC, IC5306 to 5309 operate so that only the output of the ternary Y/C separator circuit is turned on. If the input signal is of PAL/PAL_M,/PAL_N, IC5306 to 5309 operate so that only the output of the 3-line Y/C separator circuit is turned on. When the input signal is of SECAM, IC5306 to 5309 operate so that the VIDEO composite signal is immediately turned on. When the VIDEO mode is for VIDEO3 (S input), there is no dependence on the color system and the circuits operate so that the Y/C signal output of IC5001 is always turned on. (1) Ternary Y/C separation (For NTSC) The VIDEO signal output of Q5018 is processed for band limitation at FL5301. It is then processed for the level and Characteristic F compensation at the AMP (Q5302 to Q5305) in the latter stage. After this com- pensation, the signal input is entered from Q5328 to Pin 88 of IC5313, with the potential maintained at 1.0Vp-p. The same signal is processed for sync separation at Q5317 to 5319. This sync signal input is then applied to Pin 76 of IC5313. In IC5313, ternary Y/C separation is effected through an interface with IC5312, and the Y signal is output from Pin 84 of IC5313, and the C signal from Pin 83. The Y signal is processed for band limitation at FL5304, and the AMP/F characteristic compensation is carried out at Q5320 to Q5322. The resultant signal input is entered in the SW circuit of IC5307. The C signal is processed for band limitation at FL5305, and the AMP/F characteristic compensation is carried out at Q5324 to Q5326. The resultant signal input is entered in the SW circuit of IC5309. �@� IC5001� SELEC� TOR C-VIDEO Y/C Y/C Y/C S-VIDEO IC5306~� IC5309� ; SW IC5303� 3LINE Y/C separator� circuit IC5313� IC5312� Ternary Y/C separator � circuit � 4 C-VIDEO Signal Y Signal C FL5301� 6MHz LPF� Q5302�‘Q5305 ;� AMP IC5313� Ternary Y/C � separator circuit FL5304� 6MHz LPF FL5305� 6MHz LPF IC5312� Memory Q5320� ~5322 ; AMP Q5324� ~5326 ; AMP (2) 3-line Y/C separation The VIDEO signal output of Q5018 is processed for band limitation at FL5301. It is then processed for the level and Characteristic F compensation at the AMP (Q5302 to Q5305) in the latter stage. After this com- pensation, the signal input is entered from Q5304 to Pin 3 of IC5303, with the potential maintained at 1.3Vp-p. In IC5303, 3-line Y/C separation is effected, and the Y signal is output from Pin 25, and the C signal from Pin 23. The Y and C signals are processed for band limitation at FL5302 and 5303, and they are double-amplified at IC5304 and IC5305. The resultant signal input is entered in the SW circuit of IC5307 and IC5309. The outputs of IC5306 and IC5307 (Signal Y) are changed over with the DVD signal at IC5507 (TC7W66; SW) of the next stage. The output signal input is directly entered in Pin 17 of IC5504 as a sync signal. Compensation for Character F and peaking are effected at Q5512 to Q5515, and the input is entered in IC5504 (PAL/NTSC process). The outputs of IC5308 and IC5309 (Signal C) are entered in IC5504 (PAL/NTSC process) and IC5510 (SECAM decoding). C-VIDEO Signal Y Signal C FL5301� 6MHz LPF� Q5302~Q5305 ;� AMP IC5303� 3LINE Y/C � separator circuit FL5302� 6MHz LPF FL5303� 6MHz LPF IC5304� ; AMP IC5305� ; AMP � 5 (3) PAL/NTSC decoding After passing through the built-in delay line of IC5504, the Y signal is then output from Pin 4. This signal is applied to Pin 15 of IC5503 (CTI) and double-amplified there. The resultant output is then generated from Pin 2. The output signal of Pin 2 passes through DL5501 and IC5501, and is then returned to Pin 53 of IC5504. It is further led to the internal RGB matrix through the pedestal clamp, black expander, DC repro- duction, sharpness circuit, etc. The C signal is processed for system discrimination. When it is defined for the PAL or NTSC, it is then processed through the APC circuit, ACC circuit, carrier reproduction, and the phase detection circuit to make up the R-Y/B-Y signals. The signal output is once generated from Pin 5 and Pin 6, and then entered in Pins 12/13 of IC5510 (SECAM decoding). After passing through the internal switch, the outputs are generated from Pins 10 and 11, and sequentially entered in the next stage. [In regard to information for system discrimination, the control signal output is generated from Pins 3 and 7 of IC5504, in order to control IC5510 (SECAM decoding) and IC5508 (1H DELAY).] In IC5508 (1H DELAY), the signal is amplified and its output is generated from Pins 29 and 30. This output is applied to Pins 7 and 8 of IC5503 (CTI). Internal color processing is conducted in IC5504, and the resultant output is fed to the RGB matrix. At the RGB matrix stage, this chrominance signal and the foregoing brightness signal are used to generate the analog RGB signal at the RGB matrix stage. Pin 15 Signal Y Pin 53 IC5504� VIDEO Pin 4� CHROMA IC5503� CTI� Pin 15 Pin 2 DL5501/IC5501� (Delay line/SW) Frow of Signal Y Pin 13 Signal C Signal R-Y/B-Y Signal R-Y/B-Y Signal R-Y/B-Y Signal R-Y/B-Y IC5504� VIDEO� CHROMA IC5510� SECAM� DEMO IC5509� 1HDELAY IC5503� CTI Frow of Signal C Pin 51/52 6 (4) SECAM decoding When a color signal of SECAM is received, IC5510 (SECAM decoding) receives the control signal from Pin 3 of IC5504 (PAL/NTSC). Inside the IC5510 (SECAM decoding), the chroma signal input of Pin 24 is processed for band limitation at the bell filter and is then amplified at the limiter circuit. Since then, FM decoding and de-emphasis are carried out. After the signal has been switched with the foregoing control signal, the chrominance output is generated from Pin 10 and Pin 11. When this signal input is entered in Pins 26/27 of IC5508 (1H DELAY), operation of interpolation is con- ducted at the intervals of one hour (1H) and the output is generated from Pins 29/30. This output is entered in Pins 7 and 8 of IC5503 (CTI). In IC5503, profile compensation for the color signals is effected. When the output is generated from Pins 11 and 12, it is then returned to Pins 51 and 52 of IC5504. (5) 1H DELAY Information about the color system of received signals is entered from Pin 7 of IC5504 to Pin 24 and Pin 25 of IC5508. According to this information, presence of operation in the internal circuits is examined and AMP gain changeover is carried out. System Voltages at Pin 24 and Pin 25 of IC5508 NTSC 0V PAL 8.3V SECAM 4.6V 7 I MAIN PWB Block 1. Video signal processor block In the MAIN PWB, each video signal selected at the VIDEO PWB is converted into a digital signal for the purpose of various signal processing such as enlargement, contraction, and so on. The processed signal output is sent to the plasma display module. The contents of signal flow control and IC processing for analog signal inputs are different from those for digital signal inputs (RGB3). In addition, for the respective analog signal inputs, the flow of signals can differ according to the type of an input signal. (1) Flow of video signals, video (for RGB inputs), HDTV (for RGB inputs) signals The RGB signal input entered from the YU connector is converted into a digital signal at the AD converter, IC6501. (Processing of RGB x 8 bits x 2 phases = 48 lines) IC7501 is used to convert an RGB signal into a chrominance (422) signal. In IC8003, a horizontal interlace signal of 15 kHz (34 kHz) is converted into a progressive signal of 31 kHz (67 kHz). IC8502 is in charge of screen size conversion for normal size, full size, digital zoom, etc. The processed signal inputs are entered in IC9000 again. In this IC9000, γ process- ing, gradation processing, and white balance processing are carried out for digital video signals. In addition, the synthesis of ON-screen signals is carried out there. In IC9003 and IC9004, 48-bit parallel signals are processed for conversion into LVDS serial signals and the output is sent to the plasma display module (“AD” connector). (2) Flow of DVD and HDTV (chrominance input) signals The chrominance signal input entered from the YU connector is converted into a digital signal at the AD converter, IC6501. (Processing of YUV x 8 bits x 2 phases = 48 lines) IC7501 is used for the processing of color depth and tone. In IC8003, a horizontal interlace signal of 15 kHz (33 kHz) is converted into a progres- sive signal of 31 kHz (67 kHz). In IC9000, the chrominance signal is converted into the RGB signal. IC8502 is in charge of screen size conversion for normal size, full size, digital zoom, etc. The processed signal inputs are entered in IC9000 again. In this IC9000, γ processing, gradation processing, and white balance processing are carried out for digital video signals. In addition, the synthesis of ON-screen signals is carried out there. In IC9003 and IC9004, 48-bit parallel signals are processed for conversion into LVDS serial signals and the output is sent to the plasma display module (“AD” connector). LPF� Video:8MHz� HD:30MHz AD� Converter� IC6501 I-P� Convert� IC8003 � 422→RGB� IC9000 � Change Size� IC8502 γ Process� On screen� IC9000 � RGB→422� IC7501 "YU" Parallel→� serial� IC9403, 4 LPF� Video:8MHz� HD:30MHz AD� Converter� IC6501 I-P� Convert� IC8003 � 422→RGB� IC9000 � Change Size� IC8502 γ Process� On screen� IC9000 � Color/Tint� IC7501 "YU" Parallel→� serial� IC9403, 4 8 (3) Flow of 480P, 720P (chrominance input), and 480P, 720P (RGB input) signals The chrominance (or RGB) signal input entered from the YU connector is converted into a digital signal at the AD converter, IC6501. (Processing of YUV or RGB x 8 bits x 2 phases = 48 lines) IC7501 is used for the processing of color depth and tone for the chrominance (422) signal and the resultant signal is converted into an RGB signal. The RGB signal is once put into chrominance conversion for the processing of color depth and tone. Since then, the signal is again converted into an RGB signal. IC8502 is in charge of screen size conversion for normal size, full size, digital zoom, etc. IC9000 sends out an output signal of IC8502 to IC8003. This IC8003 is in charge of enhancer processing and NR processing. The processed signal input is entered in IC9000 again. In this IC9000, γ processing, gradation processing, and white balance processing are carried out for digital video signals. In addition, the synthesis of ON-screen signals is also carried out there. In IC9003 and IC9004, 48-bit parallel signals are processed for conversion into LVDS serial signals and the output is sent to the plasma display module (“AD” connector). (4) Flow of RGB1/2 (analog RGB) signals The RGB signal input entered from the PC connector is converted into a digital signal at the AD converter, IC6701. (Processing of RGB x 8 bits x 2 phases = 48 lines) IC7501 sends out an output signal of IC6701 to IC8502. IC8502 is in charge of screen size conversion for normal size, full size, digital zoom, etc. IC9000 sends out an output signal of IC8502 to IC8003. This IC8003 is in charge of enhancer processing and NR processing. The processed signal input is entered in IC9000 again. In this IC9000, γ processing, gradation processing, and white balance processing are carried out for digital video signals. In addition, the synthesis of ON-screen signals is also carried out there. In IC9003 and IC9004, 48-bit parallel signals are processed for conversion into LVDS serial signals and the output is sent to the plasma display module (“AD” connec- tor). (5) Flow of digital signal inputs (RGB3) AD� Converter� IC6701 � Select� IC7501 Change Size� IC8502 Select� IC9000 Enhance/NR� IC8003 γ Process� On screen� IC9000 "PC" Parallel→� serial� IC9403, 4 Panel Link� receiver� IC7002 � Select� IC7501 Change Size� IC8502 Select� IC9000 Enhance/NR� IC8003 γ Process� On screen� IC9000 Parallel→� serial� IC9403, 4 LPF� 30MHz AD� Converter� IC6501 � Change Size� IC8502 � Select� IC9000 � Enhance/NR� IC8003 γ Process� On screen� IC9000 � 422→RGB� IC7501 "YU" Parallel→� serial� IC9403, 4 9 When the RGB3 input is entered, the digital RGB signal input from the PL1 connector is of the serial data and it is converted into the parallel data at the panel link receiver, IC7002. (Processing of RGB x 8 bits x 2 phases = 48 lines) IC7501 sends out an output signal of IC7002 to IC8502. This IC8502 is in charge of screen size conversion for normal size, full size, digital zoom, etc. IC9000 sends out an output signal of IC8502 to IC8003. This IC8003 is in charge of enhancer processing and NR processing. The processed signal input is entered in IC9000 again. In this IC9000, γ processing, gradation processing, and white balance processing are carried out for digital video signals. In addition, the synthesis of ON-screen signals is also carried out there. In IC9003 and IC9004, 48-bit parallel signals are processed for conversion into LVDS serial signals and the output is sent to the plasma display module (“AD” connector). (6) Flow of dual screen display signals The chrominance (or RGB) signal input entered from the YU connector is converted into a digital signal at the AD converter, IC6501. The RGB signal input entered from the PC connector is converted into a digital signal at the AD converter, IC6701. In IC7501, the output signal from IC6501 is adjusted to obtain adequate color depth and tone, and the output is sent to IC8003. In IC8003 and IC8502, screen size conversion is carried out for the dual screen display. IC9000 sends out an output signal of IC8502 to IC8003. This IC8003 is in charge of enhancer processing and NR processing. The processed signal input is entered in IC9000 again. In this IC9000, processing of dual screen display is conducted through the synthesis of output sig- nals from IC8003 and IC8502. In addition, γ processing, gradation processing, and white balance process- ing are carried out for digital video signals. The synthesis of ON-screen signals is also carried out there. In IC9003 and IC9004, 48-bit parallel signals are processed for conversion into LVDS serial signals and the output is sent to the plasma display module (“AD” connector). (7) Analog filter block Before the digital conversion at the AD converter, the video signals pass through the low pass filter (LPF). Signals of motion pictures for video, HDTV, etc., pass through an LPF of 8 MHz or 30 MHz. Each switching IC (IC6005, IC6006, IC6007) is selected according to the type of signals and the output is entered in the AD converter, IC6501. The PC signal is led through a 50MHz LPF, or otherwise, it is selected for each input signal by each switching IC (IC6008, IC6009, IC6010, IC6011, IC6012, IC6013). The resultant input is entered in the AD converter, IC6701. The signal intended to select a signal is output from the I/O extension IC, IC6003. IC6003 is controlled by the I2C bus SCL2 and SDA2 from the microcomputer IC9501. � "YU" AD� Converter� IC6501 AD� Converter� IC6701 Select� IC7501 Panel Link� receiver� IC7002 "PC" "PL" Change Size� IC8003 Change Size� IC8502 Mixing� γ Process� On screen� IC9000 Parallel→� serial� IC9403, 4 10 (8) AD converter (IC6501, IC6701) block IC6501 and IC6701 are the ICs intended for the conversion of analog RGB signals into 8-bit digital signals. (However, there are 48 output lines in total, each RGB color 8 bits x 2.) In addition to the functions of AD converter, this type of IC is also provided with the various functions of analog amplifier and PLL/VCO. Each function is controlled by the I2C bus SCL6 and SDA6 from IC9501. IC6501 accepts signal inputs of motion pictures such as video signals, DVD, HDTV, etc. IC6701 picks up RGB signal inputs of still pictures from PC, etc. With the aid of the analog AMP incorporated in the IC, various adjustments are carried out, such as contrast adjustment, brightness adjustment, and white balance adjustment in the factory service mode. In addition to video signals, the IC receives inputs of horizontal and vertical sync signals. Based on these sync signals, sampling of video signals is conducted by the use of the sampling clock produced in the built- in VCO. The sampling frequency differs according to each signal input entered. The clamp signal (Pin 113) is fed from IC7501. (9) Panel link block During the entry of RGB3 input, the digital RGB signal input from the PL1 connector is of serial data, and hence the signal is converted into parallel data at the panel link receiver, IC7002. While the RGB3 input is not displayed, the microcomputer IC9501 turns the potential of the PD0 terminal (Pin 9) to be at the “L” level to set up a high impedance for the outputs of video signals, clock signals, sync signals, and DE (data enable). If a condition of no signal occurs during the entry of RGB3 input, the SCTD output terminal (Pin 8) is turned to be at the “L” level and this causes the PDO terminal to be at the “L” level, and a condition of high impedance is secured for the outputs. The PDO terminal gains an AND input of the SCDT output and microcomputer output in IC7003. In IC7004, the Plug & Play data for the panel link (for RGB3 input only) are stored. The power supply and control for IC7004 are maintained from the connected equipment (personal computer, etc.) through the PL connector. (10) Gate array (Pre G/A IC7501) block For video signal processing, IC7501 is provided mainly with the four functions specified below. These functions are controlled by bus SIK2, SID2, and CSYUMA from the microcomputer IC9501. 1 The video signal from the AD converter IC6501/IC6701 or IC7002 is selected according to the type of the input signal, and the output is sent to IC8502 and IC8003. 2 The RGB signal input from IC6501 is converted into a chrominance signal of 4:4:4 or 4:2:2. The chromi- nance signal is converted into an RGB signal. 3 For the chrominance signal that passes through the IC inside, processing is carried out in regard to the color depth and tone. 4 The peak brightness and the mean brightness of the video signal are measured. (11) I-P conversion and profile emphasis processing, RGB chrominance conversion (IC8003) block In IC8003, the horizontal 15kHz interlace signals like video signals, DVD signals, etc., are converted into 31kHz progressive signals, and the 33kHz interlace signals of the HDTV system are converted into 67kHz progressive signals. (I-P conversion) In the case of other input signals, processing of profile emphasis and noise reduction is performed. In the case of dual screen processing, processing of enlargement and con- traction is carried out. To perform processing of I-P conversion and that of enlargement and contraction, a RAM (IC8004) is used. IC8004 is a control IC for IC8003. The method of image display for I-P conversion and profile emphasis processing is controlled by I2C bus (SDA1, SCL1) from the microcomputer IC9501. X8000 is a clock signal source for IC8003 system operation (10 MHz). IC6550 operates when the potential of the system reset terminal XRST is at the [H] level. IC8001, IC8002, and IC8006 function as the power source to drive IC8003. They generate outputs of 1.4V, 1.9V, and 2.5V, respectively. 11 (12) Definition conversion processing block (IC8502) Using the SDRAM (consisting of IC8503 and IC8504), IC8502 performs the conversion of the XGA signal to a level equivalent to VGA, the modification of the screen size for normal, full, etc., zoom operation, and the movement of the screen position. This IC8502 also performs color temperature regulation according to the user menu. For memory control, a clock signal of 100MHz is produced at X8501. This signal is supplied to IC8502 and each SDRAM. The clock signals and the horizontal and vertical sync signals to be entered in IC8502 are classified into two categories. One is the signal (input side) synchronized with the input signal and the other is the signal (output side) synchronized with the signal to be supplied to the plasma display module. Like the video signals, the clock and sync signals are fed from IC7501 and IC9000, respectively. (13) ON-screen signal generator block IC9401 is generating ON-screen signals. The contents of display are controlled by the SBD, SBK, and CSOSD signals sent from the microcomputer IC9501. The SBD, SBK, and CSOSD signals are put into the conversion of 5V → 3V through IC9405 and the input is entered in IC9401. The clock, horizontal sync, and vertical sync signals are sent from the IC9000 block. (14) Gate array block (Post G/A IC9000) For video signal processing, IC9000 is provided mainly with the four functions specified below. These functions are controlled by bus SIK2, SID2, and CSYUMA from the microcomputer IC9501 and by the signals of signal reset and video mute. 1 The video signal output from IC8003 is sent to IC8502. The video signal from IC8502 is output to IC8003. This output is ON/OFF controlled by the microcomputer. 2 The video signal from IC8003/IC8502 is selected. In the case of dual screen processing, synthesis processing is carried out and the output is sent to IC9403 and IC9404. 3 γ processing is conducted for video signals. The γ curve is set up by the microcomputer. 4 IC9401 (ON-screen IC) is controlled. The synthesis of ON-screen signals into video signals is carried out. (15) Plasma display module output block In IC9003 and IC9004, the 48-bit parallel video signal output from IC9000 is processed for conversion into the LVDS serial signal. The resultant output is sent to the plasma display module (“AD” connector). 2. Sync signal processor block (1) AD converter block (IC6501, IC6701) In the AD converter of IC6501 and IC6701, a sampling clock signal (clock on input side) is generated on the basis of the horizontal sync input (Pin 111) from the YU connector and the PC connector (Pin 10). Based on this clock signal at Pin 98 (Pin 99 for IC6701), a clock signal output at half the frequency is generated from Pin 101. The phase comparison output (pulses synchronized with the input horizontal sync signal) is gener- ated from Pin 103 and fed to the latter stages. The oscillation frequency for clock signals differs according to the input signal. Phase comparison is effected when the potential at Pin 106 is at the “L” level. This phase comparison pin is controlled by the phase comparison stop signal output from IC7501. (2) Panel link block (IC7002) During the entry of RGB3 input, the signals of clock, horizontal and vertical sync, and video period discrimi- nation are output. All these signals are entered in IC7501. Under the control from IC7501, clock signals are fed to other ICs. 12 (3) Gate array block (Pre G/A IC7501) IC7501 is used as a timing controller intended to generate a variety of timing pulses based on the clock and horizontal sync signals from IC6701 (AD converter) and the vertical sync signal input entered from the YU connector and the PC connector (Pin 12). The clock signals and various pulses are fed to IC6501, IC6701, IC8003, and IC8502. According to the signal type and the input mode, the output is generated through pulse changeover for IC8003 and IC8502 in conformity to the video signal output. (Refer to 1. Video signal processor block.) IC7501 operates with the system clock signal (CLKS_PRE signal) sent from IC9000. (4) Module side (output side) clock generator block The clock signal on output side is generated at X9000 (76MHz). This clock signal is supplied to each IC and the plasma display module. (5) Gate array block (Post G/A IC9000) IC9000 is used as a timing controller intended to generate a variety of timing pulses based on the clock and horizontal sync signals from IC7501 (Pre G/A) and the clock signal from X9000. The clock signals and various pulses are fed to IC8003, IC8502, IC9401, IC9403, and IC9404 on input side. According to the signal type and the input mode, the output is generated through pulse changeover for IC8003 and IC8502 in conformity to the video signal output. (Refer to 1. Video signal processor block.) 3. System control block IC9501 is used as a microcomputer (µ-COM) for system control. In this IC9501, various controls are carried out, such as input signal changeover, setting in the A/D converter block, adjustment of the timing and video chroma block for the output signals from the timing controller, selection of the hue and color depth level for the HD decoder and the method of digital signal processing, various controls of the plasma display module, diagnostic judgment for troubleshooting inside the set, and so on. Pin 34 of the microcomputer IC9501 is used as a reset terminal. It is connected to the reset IC (IC9505). This terminal generally works at 5V. The contents of control are described below. For the matters not described here, please refer to the relevant explanations given to each individual circuit block. (1) Input signal discrimination The microcomputer performs the discrimination of input signal type based on the horizontal sync and verti- cal sync signals (Pin 7 and Pin 9 of the YU connector and the PC connector) and the information (at Pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 of the BU connector) sent from the VIDEO PWB through the I2C bus. Based on the result of the above-mentioned discrimination, the microcomputer performs the control of various blocks. During the entry of VIDEO3 input (for an input at Terminal S), the detection of S2 (automatic discrimination of the Terminal S system) is carried out. With the voltage at Pin 3, the screen size (screen mode) is automatically modified. Voltage at Pin 3 Other than the right 1.4~2.4V 3.5~5.0 Result of discrimination 4:3 (general) 4:3 (letter box) 16:9 (squeeze) Screen size By user’s selection Zoom Full During the entry of RGB3 input, the presence (if any) of the input signal is identified according to the status of the SCDT terminal (Pin 100, at “H” in ordinary operation) and operation for power management is con- ducted. 13 (2) Auto-picture function In IC7501, the screen position data are computed according to the input video signal when the auto-picture feature is turned ON for the RGB input. During the entry of RGB3 input, the screen position data are computed based on the DE signal sent from IC7002. The microcomputer picks up the screen position data from IC7501, and sets up the screen position in IC7501 and IC8502 based on the obtained data. (3) Last memory function The input mode, power ON/OFF status, setting values of various user controls, factory servicing values, and such data are stored in an external EEPROM (IC9504). During the entry of VIDEO input, however, data of color, tint, and UCOL are stored in IC1011 of the VIDEO PWB. In the SECAM mode, data of R-Y, B-Y, and BELL are also stored in this IC1011. (4) Error detector block The microcomputer is in charge of fan stoppage, plasma display module alarming, and temperature sensor detection. 1 Detection of fan stop Two fans are loaded on the set main body. If a stop signal ([H]) from either fan is entered in IC9805 and even a single fan unit stops as a result, the “L” signal is sent to the microcomputer IC9501. When either fan stops, the relevant LED blinks in green and the power supply assumes a standby condition. The function of fan stop detection is disabled when Pin 2 and Pin 3 of S9802 are short-circuited with a jumper wire or the like. 2 Panel crack detection If there is any abnormality in the plasma display module (signal system), an alarm signal is sent from Pin 37 of the “AD” connector to Pin 100 of the microcomputer. When this terminal is at the “L” level, the LEDs repeat reciprocal lighting in red and green, in order to indicate a condition of power supply in standby mode. To reset alarming, the input changeover key is kept pressed at the set main body and the mains POWER of the main body is turned “ON.” In this case, it is necessary to keep pressing the input changeover key at the main unit for more than 2 seconds. 3 Temperature error detection When the temperature sensor of the power unit senses any abnormality or when Pin 8 of the “PN” connector is turned to be at the “L” level, the LED flashes in red and a condition of power standby is assumed. (5) Temperature sensor block The information about the internal temperature in the set is transmitted from the temperature sensor boards (SEND PWB, SENT PWB, SENU PWB) to the microcomputer via the I2C bus SCL5 and SDA5 of the T1, T3 connector. Based on this information, the microcomputer controls the output voltage of the regulator IC9802 and IC9803 via IC9805. In this fashion, fan revolutions are increased and decreased. (6) Remote control block This system is applicable to remote controls. An infrared remote control light receiver block RV2101 is mounted on the LED PWB. Its signal input is entered in IC9808 through the “LD” connector. The 232C PWB is provided with the wired remote control input terminals and an input from the “RA” connector is entered in IC9808. In IC9808, a signal of infrared remote control is generally selected and its input is fed to Pin 7 of the microcomputer IC9501. When a wired remote control is connected, the potential at Pin 2 of IC9808 is turned at the “L” level and the signal of wired remote control is selected so that its input is entered in the microcomputer. 14 (7) Control lock block When S2001 is turned on (pressed condition) inside the 232C PWB, Pin 19 of the microcomputer IC9501 is turned “H” and all keys other than the POWER key of the set main body are disabled. (8) PDP module control block With the PDP module, information about the screen position and input signals is controlled by the micro- computer through the bus SDATA, SCK, and LE. Power save control for the PDP module is effected through Pins 32, 33, 34, 35, and 36 of the AD connector. Pin 34 is used for the average brightness data input from the PDP module. (9) Voice control block The AUDIO unit controls the sound volume, balance, and the sound quality through IC9505 with the aid of the bus SDA2AE and SCL2AE. Transmission of the voice output is suspended when Pin 3 of the AE connector (SMUTE terminal) is at the “H” level or when Pin 4 of the AE connector (POMUTE terminal) is at the “L” level. METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 7-1 1 (Cautions) 1. Before disassembly, turn power off the main unit and pull out the power plug from the wall outlet. 2. Use a screwdriver with a fitting size. Otherwise, the screw threads may be damaged. 3. Reassembly can be carried out in the reverse order for disassembly. Refer to the disassembly procedures and forward reassembly in the reverse order. 4. The order for taking out the parts (or components) is indicated by the foregoing numeral that is attached to the name of each part (or component). 5. The wire connector symbol is indicated by two digits of Marking . Read CN- when examining the table of parts. Month of manufacture label Month of manufacture label (M24) Earth label (M25) (Caution) This label shall be stuck to bottom left of the AC inlet. Output label (M36) (Caution) �This label shall be stuck beneath the � � polarity indication of the SP terminal. Rear nameplate (M26) Supplement sheet (SYMBOL M44) (Caution) Use a Scotch tape for adhesion. Serial label (M29) (Caution) �This label shall be stuck above � � the EXTERNAL CONTROL. 2 Removal of the back cover PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF (SRW13) X54 � Rear panel (M28) CONNECTOR-BOLT (60) (M47) X4 LEGS (STAND) (M48) X29 1 2 3 Removal of the MAIN PWB TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW20) X11 TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW16) X7 MAIN PWB (A01) Cover MAIN (M14) SENU PWB� (A06) SENS PWB (A04) TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW12) X3 SENT PWB (A05) Edge saddle TE012 (M18) Edge saddle EDS1208U (M17) Edge saddle EDS1717U (M35) X2 Lead clamper (M41) X15 (Caution)�For reassembly, tighten the � � round terminal of Connector � � AD together. 1 2 3 4 4 Removal of the VIDEO PWB TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW17) X5 VIDEO PWB (A02) TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW21) X4 PL cable (PL) Special screw (SWR28) X2 Special screw (SRW29) X2 CBIPS*3*8*3KF (SRW26) X8 Terminal panel VIDEO (M34) Shield plate (M32) PANEL PWB (A03) Gasket (M22) 55±5mm Terminal panel VIDEO (M34) Rear side view 2 3 1 5 Removal of the AC inlet (Caution) �Wires in blue, brown, and green shall � � be mounted altogether. Cable 2P (E05) Ferrite core ZCAT3035 (FL30) (Caution) �GND shall be wound by � � one turn. Ferrite core ZCAT2032 (FL31) (Caution) �GND shall be wound by � � one turn. Ferrite core ESD-R-19 (FL32) (Caution) �Tightening torque : 1.5±0.1N•m ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF (M19) X1 (Caution) The barrier shall be� � positioned so that its� � bent side faces downwards. (Caution) Insert the cable in the AC inlet until its terminal hook is locked. After� � insertion, try to pull the cable to confirm whether or not it comes out. � � To disconnect the cable, push the lock release terminal by a finger in � � the direction of the arrow, and pull out the cable in the lengthwise � � direction. (No unlocking unless the position of hook's tip is lower than � � the lock hole bottom side.) Barrier inlet (M46) PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KF � (M45) X2 AC inlet (E04) Blue Brown Cable 1P (E06) Insulation tube Hook Lock release � terminal Lock hole bottom side Side view Set lower side view SP PWB (A12) Bracket SP (M08) Special screw (SRW30) X2 C/L button (M09) CBIPS*3*8*3KF (SRW27) X2 RM cable (RM) LM cable (LM) TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW25) X2 232C PWB (A08) TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW24) X1 TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW19) X4 8 6 7 5 4 3 9 1 2 6 Removal of the audio AMP module Special screw (M38) X2 Audio AMP module (A13) TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW18) X3 Cover bottom R (M13) Cover bottom L (M12) TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW33) X5 TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW33) X5 TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW10) X9 Terminal panel PS (M33) 2 3 1 7 Removal of the power unit TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW31) X6 Power unit (A14) Fan (E02) Fan (E01) X2 PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF (M39) X6 PW cable (PW) LD cable (LD) PWR PWB (A10) TP-M4*8*3KF � (SRW11) X2 Cover SW (M15) Button (M40) Bracket bottom X2 Bracket foot X2 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF (SRW32) X2X2 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF (SRW15) X2X2 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF � (SRW14) X4X2 1 2 8 Removal of the various brackets Bracket MAIN (M06) TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW06) X8 Bracket FAN (M04) Shield plate L (M30) Shield plate R (M31) TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW09) X8 TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW04) X12 TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW05) X12 TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW07) X11 Bracket AUDIO (M02) TP-M4*8*3KF (SRW08) X9 Bracket PS (M07) (Caution) For reassembly, tighten the round terminal (E03) together. 5 6 8 3 4 2 1 9 7 11 10 12 9 Removal of the PDP module (Caution) �For reassembly, insert the side, � � bearing no AD label. PD cable (PD) Chassis (M10) PL-CPIMS*6*20*15KF (M27) X12 Round terminal (E03) TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW23) X1 TP-M3*6*3KF (SRW22) X1 Bracket AD (M01) AD cable (AD) PH cable (PH) PDP module (P01) Clamper LCT-1S (M11) 7 6 8 1 5 4 3 2 9 10 10 Removal of the front panel Filter (M20) Inner front (M23) Front panel (M21) CBIPS*4*12*3KF (SRW01) X31 CBIPS*4*12*3KF (SRW02) X3 CBIPS*4*12*3KF (SRW03) X2 CTL PWB (A09) LED PWB (A11) LE cable (LE) SW cable (SW) Cushion (M16) X6 5 2 1 4 3 8 7 6 11 Wiring procedures (Caution) �Bundle the surplus portions of wires. Fix FAN, T4, and T3 to (M42). Fix FAN and T3 to (M42). (Caution) �Bundle the surplus � � portions of wires. Fix FAN and T1 to (M42). Fix FAN and T3. Pass PD and PH through (FL20 to 22). Pass AD through (FL12). Wind T4 around (FL37) � by one turn. Wind T3 around (FL36) � by one turn. Gather FAN to (FL38) � and give one turn of � binding. Pass T1 through (FL35). Pass AE through (FL5 and FL7). Pass RS through (FL6). Pass PA through (FL11). Gather LM and RM to (FL33) and give one turn of binding. Fix FAN, T3, and AD Fix FAN and T4 to (M37) Fix PD. Fix LD, PW, and SW. Fix PM, PN, PQ, and PV. Fix FAN and T1. Fix BU, YU, and PC to (M43). Fix PL. Fix PQ, PV, and AB. Wind LE around PW and LD. Fix wires of the AC inlet Fix green wires of LD, PW, SW, and AC inlet. Fix PQ, PV, PA, LD, and PW. Fix LD, PW, SW, LM, and RM. Fix LD, PW, SW, RS, PA, and AE. LD PW LE RS LM PW AE SW RS LD PN PM F3 T3 F2 PH PD PM PN PO PV PA PI PC PC YU BU SY DS T3 T2 T1 T5 PO PV AB YU BU PL SY T1 F1 AD RM AB AE PACKAGING 8-1 PART LIST 9-1 Notes: 1. Parts orders must contain model name, parts number and parts name. 2. When you place an order for spare parts, please refer to the respective service manual and mention the right parts number on your P.O. sheets 3. The letters NSP in the table indicate non-service parts. 4. Please refer to METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY or PACKAGING of servicemanual about a parts layout. 1 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q'TY NOTE *** PDP MODULE *** P01 PDP-NP61C1MF01 09S900015 1 *** PWB ASSYS *** A01 MAIN PWB ASSY 0936D6M01 1 A02 VIDEO PWB ASSY 0936D6VA1 1 A03 PANEL PWB ASSY 0936D6VB1 1 A04 SENS PWB ASSY 0936D6VC1 1 A05 SENT PWB ASSY 0936D6VD1 1 A06 SENU PWB ASSY 0936D6VE1 1 A07 UNUSED A08 232C PWB ASSY 0935V8SA3 1 A09 CTL PWB ASSY 0935V8SB3 1 A10 PWR PWB ASSY 0935V8SC3 1 A11 LED PWB ASSY 0935V8SD3 1 A12 SP PWB ASSY 0935V8SE3 1 A13 AUDIO AMPLIFIER MODULE 03S130101 1 A14 POWER UNIT 03S110021 1 *** MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PARTS *** CN-AB CN 4P(AB) 525W,2468-26 07SW4W003 1 CN-AD CABLE 41P L450 07S530012 1 CN-AE CN 5P(AE) 300W,2468-26 07SB5W005 1 CN-BU CN 10P(BU) 125W,2468-26 07SB0W002 1 CN-DS CN 4P(DS) 50S,1007-26 073B4V002 1 CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 1275W,2468-26 07SB5W006 1 CN-LE CN 5P(LE) 200,2468-26 073B508LE 1 CN-LM CN 3P(LM) 325,2468-26 073B313LM 1 CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 073B624PA 1 CN-PC CN 13P(PC) 150W,MIX 07SBCW001 1 CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 825W,1007-20 07SW0W003 1 CN-PH CN 9P(PH) 550W,1007-20 07SW9W003 1 CN-PL CABLE,TWINAX 21P L450 07S530002 1 CN-PM CN 12P(PM) 250W,2468-26 07SBBW004 1 CN-PN CN 8P(PN) 250W,2468-26 07SB8W002 1 CN-PQ CN 5P(PQ) 675,2468-26 073B527PQ 1 CN-PV CN 4P(PV) 725,2468-26 073B429PV 1 CN-PW CN 6P(PW) 1275W,2468-26 07SB6W003 1 CN-RM CN 2P(RM) 350,2468-26 073B214RM 1 CN-RS CN 9P(RS) 350W,2468-26 07SB9W002 1 CN-SW CN 3P(SW) 1100W,2468-26 07SB3W002 1 CN-SY CN 5P(SY) 175W,1691-28 07SB5W001 1 CN-T1 CN 4P(T1) 400W,2468-26 07SB4W002 1 CN-T3 CN 4P(T3) 750W,2468-26 07SB4W003 1 CN-T4 CN 4P(T4) 525,2468-26 073B421T4 1 CN-YU CN 12P(YU) 125W,MIX 07SBBW003 1 FL11 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL12 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL20 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 FL21 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 FL22 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 FL30 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 AC INLET SASSY PX-61XM1A [01272060] VER. 19 2 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q’TY NOTE FL31 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 AC INLET SASSY FL32 FERRITE CORE(ESD-R-19) 061605166 1 AC INLET SASSY FL33 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL35 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL36 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL37 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL38 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL5 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL6 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL7 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 E01 FAN MOTOR 109P1212L4D03 03S170001 2 E02 FAN MOTOR 109P1212L4D04 03S170002 1 E03 CONNECTOR 073300126 1 E04 AC INLET 10GEEG3C 06S760006 1 AC INLET SASSY E05 CABLE 2P L240 07S530014 1 AC INLET SASSY E06 CABLE 1P L360 07S530015 1 AC INLET SASSY *** MECHANISM PARTS *** SRW01 CBIPS*4*12*3KF 024N03711 31 SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*3KF 024N03711 1 SRW03 CBIPS*4*12*3KF 024N03711 2 SRW04 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 12 SRW05 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 12 SRW06 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 8 SRW07 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 11 SRW08 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 9 SRW09 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 8 SRW10 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 9 SRW11 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 2 SRW12 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 3 SRW13 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 54 SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 8 SRW15 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 4 SRW16 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 7 SRW17 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 5 SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 3 SRW19 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 4 SRW20 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 11 SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 4 SRW22 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 1 SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 2 SRW24 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 1 SRW25 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 2 SRW26 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 024N03691 8 SRW27 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 024N03691 2 SRW28 SCREW(D-SUB) 024N03112 2 SRW29 SCREW(D-SUB) 024N03112 2 SRW30 SCREW(D-SUB) 024N03112 2 SRW31 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 6 SRW32 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 4 SRW33 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 10 M01 BRACKET(AD) 029F00171 1 3 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q'TY NOTE M02 BRACKET(AUDIO)ASSY 029HS0251 1 M03 BRACKET(BOTTOM) 029H00431 2 M04 BRACKET(FAN)PS 029H00481 1 M05 BRACKET(FOOT) 029P00351 2 M06 BRACKET(MAIN)ASSY 029HS0261 1 M07 BRACKET(PS)ASSY 029HS0241 1 M08 BRACKET(SP) 029P00301 1 M09 C/L BUTTON 024G05221 1 M10 CHASSIS 029H00341 1 M11 CLAMP(LCT-1S) 029C00551 1 M12 COVER(BOTTOM-L)ASSY 029PS0421 1 M13 COVER(BOTTOM-R)ASSY 029PS0431 1 M14 COVER(MAIN) 029H00451 1 M15 COVER(SW) 029FS0031 1 M16 CUSHION(FILTER) 029J00171 6 M17 EDGING SADDLE(EDS-1208U) 029C00461 2 M18 EDGING(TE-012) 029C00541 1 M19 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 024N04001 1 M20 FILTER 029KS0051 1 M21 FRONT PANEL ASSY 029DS0101 1 M22 GASKET(L430*6*T6) 029C00681 1 M23 INNER FRONT 029H00351 1 M24 UNUSED M25 UNUSED M26 NAME PLATE(60XM1A) 029L00541 1 NSP M27 PL-CPIMS*6*20*15KF 029N00101 12 M28 REAR PANEL ASSY 029PS0291 1 M29 SERIAL LABEL 024L44731 1 M30 SHIELD PLATE(L)ASSY 029HS0271 1 M31 SHIELD PLATE(R)ASSY 029HS0281 1 M32 SHIELD PLATE(VIDEO) 029H00621 1 M33 TERMINAL PANEL(PS) 029P00341 1 M34 TERMINAL PANEL(VIDEO) 029P00331 1 M35 EDGE SADDLE 024C04371 2 M36 UNUSED M37 BAND (L=100) 024280701 1 M38 SCREW,P-CPIMS*3*14*3KF 024850121 2 M39 PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF 0910E3196 6 M40 BUTTON(PWR 024G05211 1 M41 CLAMPER,WIRE 012281301 15 M42 LEAD CLAMPER(D5.2) 024C00091 3 M43 CLAMPER,WIRE (D8.3 024C00101 1 M44 SUPPLEMET SHEET (PDP) 078038501 1 M45 PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KF 0910E3063 2 M46 BARRIER(INLET) 024J15941 1 AC INLET SASSY M47 CONNECTOR-BOLT(60) 024N04431 4 M48 LEGS(STAND) 024J12331 29 *** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS *** FL40 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 061605059 1 FL41 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 061605059 1 FL42 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SB 06S170002 1 4 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q’TY NOTE FL43 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SB 06S170002 1 PSC POWER CORD U3 L3.0M L 07S552001 1 PK01 STOPPER 024282431 2 PK02 BAG,POLYETHYLENE(150*370) 024813191 2 PK03 JOINT 024CS0551 4 PK04 PROTECTION SHEET 029M00231 1 PK05 CARTON BOX(T)A 029MS0481 1 PK06 CARTON BOX(B) 029MS0441 1 PK07I NNER CARTON 029MS0451 2 PK08 INNER TOP 029MS0461 1 PK09 INNER PILLAR 029MS0471 2 PK10 ACCESSORY BOX(61XM1A) 029MS0511 1 PK11 CUSHION(TL) 029MS0531 1 PK12 CUSHION(TR) 029MS0541 1 PK13 CUSHION(TC) 029MS0551 1 PK14 CUSHION(BL) 029MS0561 1 PK15 CUSHION(BR) 029MS0571 1 PK16 CUSHION(BC) 029MS0581 1 PK17 CUSHION(BTM-L) 029MS0591 1 PK18 CUSHION(BTM-R) 029MS0601 1 PK19 CUSHION(SIDE)A 029MS1351 2 PK20 CUSHION(SIDE)B 029MS1361 2 PK21 REM-T HAND UNIT RP-100 03S120002 1 PK22 BATTERY,DRY CELL UM-4*2 068001007 2 PK23 UNUSED PK24 CABLE,REMOTE CONTROLLER 073499404 1 PK25 CABLE,D-SUB 15P L1800 07S580001 1 PK26 EYEBOLTS-M8*15KF 029N00111 2 PK27 WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220 078047921 1 PK28 BAG,POLYETHYLENE(270*370) 024806961 1 PK29 NOTICE SHEET A(PDP) 078038621 1 PK30 USER'S MANUAL PX-61XMA 07S800261 1 PK31 UNUSED PK32 UNUSED PK33 UNUSED PK34 BAR CODE SERIAL LABEL 016761791 1 1 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q’TY NOTE *** PDP MODULE *** P01 PDP-NP61C1MF01 09S900015 1 *** PWB ASSYS *** A01 MAIN PWB ASSY 0936D6M01 1 A02 VIDEO PWB ASSY 0936D6VA1 1 A03 PANEL PWB ASSY 0936D6VB1 1 A04 SENS PWB ASSY 0936D6VC1 1 A05 SENT PWB ASSY 0936D6VD1 1 A06 SENU PWB ASSY 0936D6VE1 1 A07 UNUSED A08 232C PWB ASSY 0935V8SA3 1 A09 CTL PWB ASSY 0935V8SB3 1 A10 PWR PWB ASSY 0935V8SC3 1 A11 LED PWB ASSY 0935V8SD3 1 A12 SP PWB ASSY 0935V8SE3 1 A13 AUDIO AMPLIFIER MODULE 03S130101 1 A14 POWER UNIT 03S110021 1 *** MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PARTS *** CN-AB CN 4P(AB) 525W,2468-26 07SW4W003 1 CN-AD CABLE 41P L450 07S530012 1 CN-AE CN 5P(AE) 300W,2468-26 07SB5W005 1 CN-BU CN 10P(BU) 125W,2468-26 07SB0W002 1 CN-DS CN 4P(DS) 50S,1007-26 073B4V002 1 CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 1275W,2468-26 07SB5W006 1 CN-LE CN 5P(LE) 200,2468-26 073B508LE 1 CN-LM CN 3P(LM) 325,2468-26 073B313LM 1 CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 073B624PA 1 CN-PC CN 13P(PC) 150W,MIX 07SBCW001 1 CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 825W,1007-20 07SW0W003 1 CN-PH CN 9P(PH) 550W,1007-20 07SW9W003 1 CN-PL CABLE,TWINAX 21P L450 07S530002 1 CN-PM CN 12P(PM) 250W,2468-26 07SBBW004 1 CN-PN CN 8P(PN) 250W,2468-26 07SB8W002 1 CN-PQ CN 5P(PQ) 675,2468-26 073B527PQ 1 CN-PV CN 4P(PV) 725,2468-26 073B429PV 1 CN-PW CN 6P(PW) 1275W,2468-26 07SB6W003 1 CN-RM CN 2P(RM) 350,2468-26 073B214RM 1 CN-RS CN 9P(RS) 350W,2468-26 07SB9W002 1 CN-SW CN 3P(SW) 1100W,2468-26 07SB3W002 1 CN-SY CN 5P(SY) 175W,1691-28 07SB5W001 1 CN-T1 CN 4P(T1) 400W,2468-26 07SB4W002 1 CN-T3 CN 4P(T3) 750W,2468-26 07SB4W003 1 CN-T4 CN 4P(T4) 525,2468-26 073B421T4 1 CN-YU CN 12P(YU) 125W,MIX 07SBBW003 1 FL11 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL12 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL20 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 FL21 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 FL22 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 FL30 FERRITE CORE 061605095 1 AC INLET SASSY PX-61XM1G [01272061] VER. 19 2 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q’TY NOTE FL31 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 AC INLET SASSY FL32 FERRITE CORE(ESD-R-19) 061605166 1 ACÅ INLET SASSY FL33 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL35 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL36 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL37 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL38 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL5 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL6 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 FL7 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-93 061605059 1 E01 FAN MOTOR 109P1212L4D03 03S170001 2 E02 FAN MOTOR 109P1212L4D04 03S170002 1 E03 CONNECTOR 073300126 1 E04 AC INLET 10GEEG3C 06S760006 1 AC INLET SASSY E05 CABLE 2P L240 07S530014 1 AC INLET SASSY E06 CABLE 1P L360 07S530015 1 AC INLET SASSY *** MECHANISM PARTS *** SRW01 CBIPS*4*12*3KF 024N03711 31 SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*3KF 024N03711 1 SRW03 CBIPS*4*12*3KF 024N03711 2 SRW04 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 12 SRW05 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 12 SRW06 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 8 SRW07 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 11 SRW08 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 9 SRW09 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 8 SRW10 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 9 SRW11 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 2 SRW12 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 3 SRW13 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 54 SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 8 SRW15 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 4 SRW16 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 7 SRW17 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 5 SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 3 SRW19 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 4 SRW20 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 11 SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 4 SRW22 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 1 SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 2 SRW24 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 1 SRW25 TP-M3*6*3KF 024N04581 2 SRW26 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 024N03691 8 SRW27 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 024N03691 2 SRW28 SCREW(D-SUB) 024N03112 2 SRW29 SCREW(D-SUB) 024N03112 2 SRW30 SCREW(D-SUB) 024N03112 2 SRW31 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 6 SRW32 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KF 0910E4033 4 SRW33 TP-M4*8*3KF 024N04591 10 M01 BRACKET(AD) 029F00171 1 3 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q’TY NOTE M02 BRACKET(AUDIO)ASSY 029HS0251 1 M03 BRACKET(BOTTOM) 029H00431 2 M04 BRACKET(FAN)PS 029H00481 1 M05 BRACKET(FOOT) 029P00351 2 M06 BRACKET(MAIN)ASSY 029HS0261 1 M07 BRACKET(PS)ASSY 029HS0241 1 M08 BRACKET(SP) 029P00301 1 M09 C/L BUTTON 024G05221 1 M10 CHASSIS 029H00341 1 M11 CLAMP(LCT-1S) 029C00551 1 M12 COVER(BOTTOM-L)ASSY 029PS0421 1 M13 COVER(BOTTOM-R)ASSY 029PS0431 1 M14 COVER(MAIN) 029H00451 1 M15 COVER(SW) 029FS0031 1 M16 CUSHION(FILTER) 029J00171 6 M17 EDGING SADDLE(EDS-1208U) 029C00461 2 M18 EDGING(TE-012) 029C00541 1 M19 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 024N04001 1 M20 FILTER 029KS0051 1 M21 FRONT PANEL ASSY 029DS0101 1 M22 GASKET(L430*6*T6) 029C00681 1 M23 INNER FRONT 029H00351 1 M24 UNUSED M25 UNUSED M26 NAME PLATE(60XM1G) 029L00551 1 NSP M27 PL-CPIMS*6*20*15KF 029N00101 12 M28 REAR PANEL ASSY 029PS0291 1 M29 SERIAL LABEL 024L44731 1 M30 SHIELD PLATE(L)ASSY 029HS0271 1 M31 SHIELD PLATE(R)ASSY 029HS0281 1 M32 SHIELD PLATE(VIDEO) 029H00621 1 M33 TERMINAL PANEL(PS) 029P00341 1 M34 TERMINAL PANEL(VIDEO) 029P00331 1 M35 EDGE SADDLE 024C04371 2 M36 UNUSED M37 BAND (L=100) 024280701 1 M38 SCREW,P-CPIMS*3*14*3KF 024850121 2 M39 PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF 0910E3196 6 M40 BUTTON(PWR 024G05211 1 M41 CLAMPER,WIRE 012281301 15 M42 LEAD CLAMPER(D5.2) 024C00091 3 M43 CLAMPER,WIRE (D8.3) 024C00101 1 M44 SUPPLEMET SHEET EU(PDP) 078038511 1 M45 PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KF 0910E3063 2 M46 BARRIER(INLET) 024J15941 1 AC INLET SASSY M47 CONNECTOR-BOLT(60) 024N04431 4 M48 LEGS(STAND) 024J12331 29 *** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS *** FL40 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 061605059 1 FL41 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 061605059 1 FL42 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SB 06S170002 1 4 SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q’TY NOTE FL43 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SB 06S170002 1 PSC POWER CORD E3 L3 M L 070800089 1 PK01 STOPPER 024282431 2 PK02 BAG,POLYETHYLENE(150*370) 024813191 1 PK03 JOINT 024CS0551 4 PK04 PROTECTION SHEET 029M00231 1 PK05 CARTON BOX(T)G 029MS0491 1 PK06 CARTON BOX(B) 029MS0441 1 PK07 INNER CARTON 029MS0451 2 PK08 INNER TOP 029MS0461 1 PK09 INNER PILLAR 029MS0471 2 PK10 ACCESSORY BOX(61XM1G) 029MS0521 1 PK11 CUSHION(TL) 029MS0531 1 PK12 CUSHION(TR) 029MS0541 1 PK13 CUSHION(TC) 029MS0551 1 PK14 CUSHION(BL) 029MS0561 1 PK15 CUSHION(BR) 029MS0571 1 PK16 CUSHION(BC) 029MS0581 1 PK17 CUSHION(BTM-L) 029MS0591 1 PK18 CUSHION(BTM-R) 029MS0601 1 PK19 CUSHION(SIDE)A 029MS1351 2 PK20 CUSHION(SIDE)B 029MS1361 2 PK21 REM-T HAND UNIT RP-100 03S120002 1 PK22 BATTERY,DRY CELL UM-4*2 068001007 2 PK23 UNUSED PK24 PLUG CABLE (4M) 073499229 1 PK25 CABLE,D-SUB 15P L1800 07S580001 1 PK26 EYEBOLTS-M8*15KF 029N00111 2 PK27 WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220) 078047921 1 PK28 BAG,POLYETHYLENE(270*382) 024M14211 1 PK29 NOTICE SHEET EU(PDP) 078038631 1 PK30 USER'S MANUAL PX-61XMG 07S800271 1 PK31 UNUSED PK32 UNUSED PK33 UNUSED PK34 BAR CODE SERIAL LABEL 016761791 1 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 10-1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 ... 39 40 41 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 ...20 21 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 ... 39 40 41 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 . . 20 21 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SET FAN PDP MODULE DS HDSTP GND VSTP GND SCL4 SDA4 GND SCL3 SDA3 GND POSYNC SDET SMODE GND NC BU SY PC3HD GND PC3VD GND NC YOUT GND UOUT GND VOUT GND YUMHD GND YUMVD YUHD GND YUVD YU PC GOUT GND BOUT GND ROUT GND PCMHD GND PCMVD PCHD GND PCVD GND M+7V GND NC A+5V GND A+14V GND A+5V GND GND LOUT GND ROUT PC3HD GND PC3VD GND NC YOUT GND UOUT GND VOUT GND YUMHD GND YUMVD YUHD GND YUVD SCL4 SDA4 GND SCL3 SDA3 GND POSYNC SDET SMODE GND NC GOUT GND BOUT GND ROUT GND PCMHD GND PCMVD PCHD GND PCVD GND PQ PV AB GND LIN GND RIN AB M+7V TXD GND RXD M+5V GND REMIN2 WIRED_CTL CHILD_LOCK CTL1 CTL2 GND M+7V TXD GND RXD M+5V GND REMIN2 WIRED_CTL CHILD_LOCK CTL1 CTL2 GND RS SW SW RS SDA2 SCL2 SMUTE POMUTE GND AE SDA2 SCL2 SMUTE POMUTE GND 1 2 3 4 5 PA F3 PM PN F3 F1 T1 AD T3 LD PW PQ PV PA PL PW M+7V GND POWER POMUTE D+3.3V D+3.3V D+3.3V D+3.3V GND GND GND GND M+7V GND POWER POMUTE D+3.3V D+3.3V D+3.3V D+3.3V GND GND GND GND A+14 GND A+5V GND A+5V GND T-ALM1 T-ALM2 REMIN1 LEDCTL1 LEDCTL2 GND M+5V REMIN1 LEDCTL1 LEDCTL2 GND M+5V DW7 POIN GND M+5V M+7V NC DW7 POIN GND M+5V M+7V NC A+14 GND A+5V GND A+5V GND T-ALM1 T-ALM2 S+13V GND S-13V GND A+14V GND S+13V GND S-13V GND A+14V GND M+7V GND NC A+5V GND A+14V GND A+5V GND PL 1 NC 2 AX2+ 3 RX2 SHIELD 4 RX2- 5 NC 6 RX1+ 7 RX1 SHIELD 8 RX1- 9 NC 10 DDC/SCL 11 DDC/SDA 12 SENS 13 NC 14 RX0+ 15 RX0 SHIELD 16 RX0- 17 DDC+5VDC 18 RXC+ 19 RXC SHIELD 20 RXC- 21 GND 1 GND 2 RA- 3 RA+ 4 GND 5 RB- 6 RB+ 7 GND 8 RC- 9 RC+ 10 GND 11 RCLK- 12 RCLK+ 13 GND 14 RD- 15 RD+ 16 GND 17 RE- 18 RE+ 19 GND 20 RF- 21 RF+ 22 GND 23 RG- 24 RG+ 25 GND 26 RCLK2- 27 RCLK2+ 28 GND 29 RH- 30 RH+ 31 GND 32 PSCK 33 PLE 34 PSS 35 CLE 36 PSSC 37 ALARM 38 SDATA 39 SCK 40 LE 41 GND ALARM GND GND D+5 GND GND D+70 NC D+170 D+170 D+170 D+170 NC D+70 GND GND D+5 GND GND ALARM GND GND D+5 GND GND D+70 NC D+170 D+170 D+170 D+170 NC D+70 GND GND D+5 GND GND 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 GND LOUT GND ROUT GND GND LOUT GND ROUT GND LM RM A+12 GND FSIG A+12 GND FSIG A+12 GND FSIG SCL5 SDA5 A+5V GND SCL5 SDA5 A+5V GND A+12 GND FSIG SCL5 SDA5 A+5V GND 1 2 3 POWER FAN A+12 GND FSIG 1 2 3 SET FAN A+12 GND FSIG 1 2 3 4 SCL5 SDA5 A+5V GND 1 2 3 4 SCL5 SDA5 A+5V GND 1 2 3 4 SCL5 SDA5 A+5V GND LD 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 REMIN1 LEDCTL1 LEDCTL2 GND M+5V LE PANEL PWB (PCB-5001B) 232C PWB (PWC-4419A) CTL PWB (PWC-4419B) VIDEO PWB (PCB-5001A) POWER SUPPLY PWR PWB(PWC-4419C) LED PWB(PWC-4419D) AUDIO AMP MODULE SP PWB (PWC-4419E) MAIN PWB(PCB-5002) T4 SENU PWB (PCB-5001E) SENS PWB (PCB-5001C) SENT PWB (PCB-5001D) CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 1 1 Between PWBs Connector name Pin No. Signal name Acronym Complementary description Signal direction MAIN-VIDEO DS 1 HDSTP Video mute control of chroma signal LO when DS connector is available, and video output is generated. HI in case of no video output, and video mute takes place. 2 GND GND 3 VSTP Video mute control of video signal LO when DS connector is available, and video output is generated. HI in case of no video output, and video mute takes place. 4 GND GND MAIN-VIDEO BU 1 SCL4 CLK of the I2C bus For extension I/O MAIN → VIDEO 2 SDA4 DATA of the I2C bus For extension I/O MAIN → VIDEO 3 GND GND 4 SCL3 CLK of the I2C bus For VIDEO decoding, 3DYC separation, MAIN → VIDEO and 3LYC separation 5 SDA3 DATA of the I2C bus For VIDEO decoding, 3DYC separation, MAIN → VIDEO and 3LYC separation 6 GND GND 7 POSYNC Power ON/OFF control signal for Power ON with HI MAIN → VIDEO power management 8 SDET Insertion detect signal for the S terminal Presence of S terminal identified with HI VIDEO → MAIN 9 SMODE Mode detect signal for the S1/S2 Usually LO. S1: 5V, S2:2.5V VIDEO → MAIN 10 GND GND 11 NC No-connection terminal MAIN-VIDEO SY 1 PC3HD Horizontal sync signal for PC signal Horizontal sync signal for PC signal of NAIN → VIDEO (digital input) digital input 2 GND GND 3 PC3VD Vertical sync signal for PC signal Vertical sync signal for PC signal of digital MAIN → VIDEO (digital input) input 4 GND GND 5 NC No-connection terminal MAIN-VIDEO YU 1 YOUT Chroma Y signal or VIDEO G signal For the chroma signal, input signal is immediately VIDEO → MAIN output. For the video signal, each decoded original color signal is output. 2 GND GND 3 UOUT Chroma B-Y signal or VIDEO B signal For the chroma signal, input signal is immediately VIDEO → MAIN output. For the video signal, each decoded original color signal is output. 4 GND GND 5 VOUT Chroma R-Y signal or VIDEO R signal For the chroma signal, input signal is immediately VIDEO → MAIN output. For the video signal, each decoded original color signal is output. 6 GND GND 2 Between PWBs Connector name Pin No. Signal name Acronym Complementary description Signal direction 7 YUMHD Horizontal sync signal for microcomputer Horizontal sync signal input to be entered in VIDEO → MAIN microcomputer when a chroma or video signal is used. 8 GND GND 9 YUMVD Vertical sync signal for microcomputer Vertical sync signal input to be entered in VIDEO → MAIN microcomputer when a chroma or video signal is used. 10 YUHD Horizontal sync signal for A/D Horizontal sync signal input to be entered in A/D VIDEO → MAIN converter when a chroma or video signal is used. 11 GND GND 12 YUVD Vertical sync signal for A/D Vertical sync signal input to be entered in A/D VIDEO → MAIN converter when a chroma or video signal is used. MAIN-VIDEO PC 1 GOUT Signal G of PC For the PC signal, an input signal is immediately VIDEO → MAIN output. 2 GND GND 3 BOUT Signal B of PC For the PC signal, an input signal is immediately VIDEO → MAIN output. 4 GND GND 5 ROUT Signal R of PC For the PC signal, an input signal is immediately VIDEO → MAIN output. 6 GND GND 7 PCMHD Horizontal sync signal for microcomputer Horizontal sync signal input to be entered in VIDEO → MAIN microcomputer of the PC signal. 8 GND GND 9 PCMVD Vertical sync signal for microcomputer Vertical sync signal input to be entered in VIDEO → MAIN microcomputer of the PC signal. 10 PCHD Horizontal sync signal for A/D Horizontal sync signal input to be entered in the VIDEO → MAIN A/D of the PC signal. 11 GND GND 12 PCVD Vertical sync signal for the A/D Vertical sync signal input to be entered in the VIDEO → MAIN A/D of the PC signal 13 GND GND VIDEO- PQ POWER SUPPLY 1 M+7V 7V power supply for microcomputer For the sync detector circuit to be used for the POWER → VIDEO recovery from the power management 2 GND GND 3 NC No-connection terminal 4 A+5V 5V power supply for analog circuit For analog signal processing POWER → VIDEO 5 GND GND VIDEO- PV POWER SUPPLY 1 A+14V 14V power supply for analog circuit For analog signal processing POWER → VIDEO 2 GND GND 3 A+5V 5V power supply for analog circuit For analog signal processing POWER → VIDEO 4 GND GND 3 Between PWBs Connector name Pin No. Signal name Acronym Complementary description Signal direction VIDEO-AUDIO AB 1 GND GND 2 LOUT Signal L Audio signal L CH VIDEO → AUDIO 3 GND GND 4 ROUT Signal R Audio signal R CH VIDEO → AUDIO RS232C-MAIN RS 1 M+7V 7V power supply; the same as for MAIN → RS232C microcomputer 2 TXD RS-232 driver output MAIN → RS232C 3 GND GND 4 RXD RS-232 receiver input MAIN → RS232C 5 M+5V 5V power supply; the same as for MAIN → RS232C microcomputer 6 GND GND 7 REMIN2 Data signal for the wired remote control RS232C → MAIN 8 WIRED_CTL Insertion control of the wired remote control Usually 5V. 0V when inserted. RS232C → MAIN 9 CHILD_LOCK Child lock control 0V for SW OFF. 5V for SW ON. RS232C → MAIN MAIN-SET FAN F1 1 A+12V 12V power supply for ANALOG MAIN → FAN 2 GND GND 3 FSIG FAN alarm signal 0V FAN → MAIN MAIN-SENT T1 MAIN-SENS T3 1 SCL5 CLK of the I2C bus For temperature sensor MAIN → SENS MAIN-SENU T4 2 SDA5 DATA of the I2C bus For temperature sensor MAIN → SENS 3 A+5V 12V power supply for ANALOG MAIN → SENS 4 GND GND MAIN-PDP MODULE AD 1 GND GND 2 RA- VIDEO input A- MAIN → PDPMODULE 3 RA+ VIDEO input A+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 4 GND GND 5 RB- VIDEO input B- MAIN → PDPMODULE 6 RB+ VIDEO input B+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 7 GND GND 8 RC- VIDEO input C- MAIN → PDPMODULE 9 RC+ VIDEO input C+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 10 GND GND 11 RCLK- CKL- for VIDEO MAIN → PDPMODULE 12 RCLK+ CKL+ for VIDEO MAIN → PDPMODULE 13 GND GND 14 RD- VIDEO input D- MAIN → PDPMODULE 15 RD+ VIDEO input D+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 16 GND GND 17 RE- VIDEO input E- MAIN → PDPMODULE 18 RE+ VIDEO input E+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 4 Between PWBs Connector name Pin No. Signal name Acronym Complementary description Signal direction 19 GND GND 20 RF- VIDEO input F- MAIN → PDPMODULE 21 RF+ VIDEO input F+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 22 GND GND 23 RG- VIDEO input G- MAIN → PDPMODULE 24 RG+ VIDEO input G+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 25 GND GND 26 RCLK2- CKL2- for VIDEO MAIN → PDPMODULE 27 RCLK2+ CKL2+ for VIDEO MAIN → PDPMODULE 28 GND GND 29 RH- VIDEO input H- MAIN → PDPMODULE 30 RH+ VIDEO input H+ MAIN → PDPMODULE 31 GND GND 32 PSCK CLK for power save data I/O MAIN → PDPMODULE 33 PLE PSS read enable MAIN → PDPMODULE 34 PSS Average signal level data output for power save PDPMODULE → MAIN 35 CLE PSS latch enable MAIN → PDPMODULE 36 PSSC Control data input for power save MAIN → PDPMODULE 37 ALARM Panel break alarm signal PDPMODULE → MAIN 38 SDATA Serial data for various data setting MAIN → PDPMODULE 39 SCK Serial CLK MAIN → PDPMODULE 40 LE Serial data latch enable MAIN → PDPMODULE 41 GND GND MAIN-SENT T2 1 SCL5 CLK of the I2C bus MAIN → SENT 2 SDA5 DATA of the I2C bus MAIN → SENT 3 A+5V 5V power supply for ANALOG signal MAIN → SENT 4 GND GND MAIN-SENT FAN T2 1 A+12V 12V power supply for ANALOG signal MAIN → FAN 2 GND GND 3 FSIG FAN alarm signal FAN → MAIN MAIN-POWER SUPPLY PM 1 M+7V 7V power supply for microcomputer POWER → MAIN 2 GND GND 3 POWER Power supply control Usually 3.7V POWER → MAIN 4 POMUTE Mute signal for power supply starting Usually 4.8V POWER → MAIN 5 D+3.3V 3.3V power supply for DIGITAL signal POWER → MAIN 6 D+3.3V 3.3V power supply for DIGITAL signal POWER → MAIN 7 D+3.3V 3.3V power supply for DIGITAL signal POWER → MAIN 8 D+3.3V 3.3V power supply for DIGITAL signal POWER → MAIN 9 GND GND 10 GND GND 11 GND GND 12 GND GND 5 Between PWBs Connector name Pin No. Signal name Acronym Complementary description Signal direction MAIN-POWER SUPPLY PN 1 A+14V 14V power supply for ANALOG signal POWER → MAIN 2 GND GND 3 A+5V 5V power supply for ANALOG signal POWER → MAIN 4 GND GND 5 A+5V 5V power supply for ANALOG signal POWER → MAIN 6 GND GND 7 T-ALM1 Alarm signal Usually 5V POWER → MAIN 8 T-ALM2 Alarm signal Usually 5V POWER → MAIN MAIN-LED LD 1 REMIN1 Infrared ray remote control data LED → MAIN 2 LEDCTL1 Standby LED control MAIN → LED 3 LEDCTL2 Standby LED control MAIN → LED 4 GND GND 5 M+5V 5V power supply for microcomputer MAIN → LED MAIN-PWR PW 1 SW7 Power supply starting control Usually 6.8V MAIN → PW 2 POIN Power supply starting detection Usually 5V PW → MAIN 3 GND GND 4 M+5V 5V power supply for microcomputer MAIN → PW 5 M+7V 7V power supply for microcomputer MAIN → PW 6 NC No-connection terminal MAIN-AUDIO AE 1 SDA2 DATA of the I2C bus MAIN → AUDIO 2 SCL2 CLK of the I2C bus MAIN → AUDIO 3 SMUTE Audio mute MAIN → AUDIO 4 POMUTE Mute signal for power supply starting MAIN → AUDIO 5 GND GND MAIN-SW SW 1 CTL1 Key input detection SW → MAIN 2 CTL2 Key input detection SW → MAIN 3 GND GND AUDIO-POWER PA SUPPLY 1 S+13V +13V power supply for audio circuit POWER → AUDIO 2 GND GND 3 S-13V -13V power supply for audio circuit POWER → AUDIO 4 GND GND 5 A+14V 14V power ANALOG circuit POWER → AUDIO 6 GND GND POWER SUPPLY- PD PDP MODULE 1 ALARM Module alarm signal MODULE → POWER 2 GND GND 6 Between PWBs Connector name Pin No. Signal name Acronym Complementary description Signal direction 3 GND GND 4 D+5V 5V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE 5 GND GND 6 GND GND 7 D+70 70V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE 8 NC No-connection terminal 9 D+170 170V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE 10 D+170 170V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE POWER SUPPLY- PH PDP MODULE 1 D+170 170V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE 2 D+170 170V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE 3 NC No-connection terminal 4 D+70 70V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE 5 GND GND 6 GND GND 7 D+5 5V power supply for DIGITAL circuit POWER → MODULE 8 GND GND 9 GND GND MIAN-PL PL (Note : MAIN PWB 1 NC No-connection terminal No. is applied to 2 RX2+ Serial signal R (+ side) PL → MAIN the PIN No.) 3 GND GND 4 RX2- Serial signal R (- side) PL → MAIN 5 NC No-connection terminal 6 RX1+ Serial signal G (+ side) PL → MAIN 7 GND GND 8 RX1- Serial signal G (- side) PL → MAIN 9 NC No-connection terminal 10 DDC/SCL CLK of the I2C bus for DDC writing PL → MAIN 11 DDC/SDA DATA of the I2C bus for DDC writing PL → MAIN 12 SENS Power supply detection MAIN → PL 13 NC No-connection terminal 14 RX0+ Serial signal B (+ side) PL → MAIN 15 GND GND 16 RX0- Serial signal B (- side) PL → MAIN 17 DDC5V 5V power supply for DDC MAIN → PL 18 RXC+ CLK serial signal (+ side) PL → MAIN 19 GND GND 20 RXC- CLK serial signal (- side) PL → MAIN 21 GND GND BLOCK DIAGRAMS 11-1 CSYN C PCSYNC_SEL1 YUSYNC_SEL1 C IN Y IN TC74AC04F HD/VD DRIVE INVERTER SN74LS221NS 1SHOT MONOSTABLE BLOCK DIAGRAM . VIDEO PWB HD VD OUT MEMORY TC7W66 Y/C SW SYNC SEP UPD64082 3DIMENSION Y/C SEPARATE (3.58NTSC) BUFFE R TA8772AN 1H DELAY VIDEO1 IN C Y TA1222BN PAL/NTSC DECODER TA1229N SECAM DEMO Y C VIDEO FL5003 6MHZ LPF BUFFE R/AMP TC9090 3LINE Y/C SEPARATE (PAL PALM/N 4.43NTSC) UPD4066 SW DL5001 200NSEC LPF BUFFER AMP BUFFE R FL5002 6MHZ LPF BUFFE R /AMP BUFFER/AMP Q5001 BUFFER Q5002 BUFFER Y C DL5002 380NSEC Q5011/ Q5037~ 5039 PEAKING AMP BUFFER R-Y B-Y OUT R-Y B-Y OUT Y OUT H OUT V OUT Y Q5003 BUFFER BUFFER/AMP C IN Y/C IN C MM125 0SW SW VIDEO2 IN FSC BUFFER YPbPr1 IN TC7W66 SW RGB1 IN RGB2 IN PNP HV SYNC PROC HV SYNC PROC YUV YPbPr/RGB RGB RGB YPbPr/RGB VIDEO Y C AUDIO1 L/R AUDIO2 L/R AUDIO3 L/ R TC7W66 SW BA7078 SYNC SEP YUV/YPbPr/RGB RGB Y Y G G H/V H/V AUDIO L/R OUT H/V H/V PICTURE1 OUT (FOR VIDEO) PICTURE2 OUT (FOR PC) SYNC1 OUT (FOR VIDEO) SYNC2 OUT (FOR PC) 3.58NTSC Y/C SEP 4.43NTSC,PAL,PAL/M,PAL/N Y/C SEP Y OUT BUFFER AMP BUFFER BUFFER BUFFER BUFFER Y G G AD8023 AMP BUFFER VIDEO DECODER BLOCK PICTURE INTERFACE BLOCK SYNC INTERFACE BLOCK BUFFE R FL5005 6MHZ LPF BUFFE R FL5004 6MHZ LPF TC7W66 PC SW RGB SW TC7W66 HD1/2 SW SW TC7W66 E-DVD SW RGB3 SYNC IN TC7W66 SW BA7078 SYNC SEP Y OG G Y YPbPr /RGB YPbP r SN74HC08 BUFFER SN74HC08 BUFFER SYNC1 OUT (FOR VIDEO) TO A/D TO CPU TA8814 CTI Y OUT GAIN ADJ PC1ON/PC2ON VHSW PC1ON/PC2ON/ PC3ON PCSW HDSEL EURO SYNCSEL AMP SYNC2 OUT (FOR PC) TO CPU TO A/D TC7W66 HV DEFEAT TC7W66 SW SN74AHC2G 66 SN74AHC2G 66 SN74AHC2G 66 SN74AHC2G 66 TC7W66 VIDEO SW YUSYNC_SEL2 PCSYNC_SEL2 H/V AD8023 AMP BUFFER 1 CTL1/CTL2 LEDCTL1/LEDCTL2 REMIN CONTROLE LOCK RXD/TXD SCL3/SDA3 SCL4/SDA4 MNMHD/MNMVD SMODE1/S1SW SBMHD/SBMVD SMODE2/S2SW CSOSD CSSCR SIK1/SID1/RSTSCR SDIN1 CSYUMA SIK2/SID2/RSTYUMA SDIN2 ENPDP SIK3/SID3 SMUTE VMUTE BLKMARI XRST/ENAMDP/ XPLLRST POWER POMUTE SCL1/SDA1 SCL2/SDA2 SCL5/SDA5 SCL6/SDA6 PDADY PDADP POSYNC POSYNC MODULE(A/D INPUT) System Controller CPU IC9501 V-I/O PWB SDA3/SCL3(to CPU) SDA1/SCL1(to CPU) SMODE1(to CPU) REGCTL POSYNC YOUT UOUT VOUT YUHD YUVD YUMHD/YUMVD(to CPU) ROUT GOUT BOUT PCHD PCVD PCMHD/PCMVD(to CPU) PC3HD PC3VD POWER SUPPLY CTL PWB CTL1/2 PWR PWB SW7 AUDIO BLOCK E2P-ROM IC9502 CAT24WC16 Flash ROM IC7502 PLASMA MODULE PLCK/PLE/CLE /PSSC/SDA3/ SCK3/ENPDP OSD IC9XXX MB90098 A SDRAM ICXXXX XXXXXXXXXX SDA1/SCL1/ENAMDP/XRST/ XPLLRS from CPU T-ALM1/2 POWER POMUTE(CPU) To/from POWER Panel Link Receiver IC7xxx THC7116 48bit Digital Signal Processor IC7506 TMCxxxxx G/A IC9004 Image Processor Matrix and Composer uPDxxxxxxx Digital Signal Processor IC8xxx IP00C721 SDRAM IC8XXX,X 64M*2 A/D Converter IC6XXX CXAXXXX Timing Generator C/D SEL OUT AMP & Buff PRE G/A ICXXXX Image Processor Matrix de-Matrix CLK H/V/DE 48 X'TAL 100MHz Buff ALVC24 PnP IC7xxx 24LC21 PANEL LINK PWB 232C PWB REMIN2 WIRE CTL CHILED LOCK SW REG M+5V LED PWB LEDCTL1/2 REMIN To/from VIDEO PWB CSSCR/SIK1/ SDIN1 To OSD To SCREEN To OSD/SCREEN Ffom SCREEN To G/A To PDP 5V 3V SMUTE from CPU To AUDIO To PDP To G/A BLKMARI To CPU H/V/FP RGB 48bit Analog video signal Digital video signal (without VIDEO mode) Digital video signal (VIDEO mode) Single Line SDA/SCL FAN OUT LFP 10MHz 30MHz RGB Selector IC6001,2,3 SN74AHC2G66 A/D Converter IC6XXX CXA3506 AMP & Buff Clamp/Mask I/O expand M62320 SDA2 SCL2 SDA6/SCL6 /PDADY Clamp/Mask CLK H Timing Generator A Sync0/Sync1 CLK0/CLK1 FLG0/FLG1 Timing Generator B LVDS Transmitter ICxxxx Composer X'TAL 76MHz SIK3/SID3 /CSOSD SIK2/SID2 SDIN2 /CSGA/RSTYUMA CLK H 76MHz 38MHz 38MHz LFP 30MHz 50MHz THROUGH RGB Selector IC6001,2,3 IC6004,5,6 SN74AHC2G66 H/V/FP sysnc2/Sync3 CLK2/CLK3 (38MHz or SAMPLING CLOCK) H/V/CLK H/V/CLK 48bit Matrix I/O expand M62320 ON/OFF REG FAN power supply REG Timing Generator C/D SEL OUT from CPU FAN*2 assist FAN*2 set REG*2 I/O expand M62320 ON/OFF OUTPUT LEVEL SDA/SCL PSS/ALARM from MODULE (5Vp-p) 5V 3V "SY" Temp Sensor*2 SDA5/SCL5 To CPU SIK2/SID2 SDA6/SCL6 /PDADP SIK2/SID2 SDIN2 /CSGA/RSTYUMA REG VDDPL REGCTL To AMDP PDO To ADC VMUTE X'TAL 10MHz "PC" "YU" "BU" MAIN PWB 2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 12-1